Added CI.

.github/workflows/main.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+name: CI
+
+concurrency:
+  group: ${{ github.ref }}
+  cancel-in-progress: true
+
+on:
+  push:
+  pull_request:
+
+jobs:
+  msvc:
+    strategy:
+      fail-fast: true
+      matrix:
+        include: [
+          { config: Debug, platform: Win32, bindir: 'win32_vs2019' },
+          { config: Debug, platform: x64, bindir: 'win64_vs2019' },
+          { config: Release, platform: Win32, bindir: 'win32_vs2019' },
+          { config: Release, platform: x64, bindir: 'win64_vs2019' },
+        ]
+    name: msvc-${{ matrix.config }}-${{ matrix.platform }}
+    runs-on: windows-2019
+    steps:
+      - name: Checkout bx
+        uses: actions/checkout@v3
+        with:
+          repository: bkaradzic/bx
+          path: bx
+      - name: Prepare
+        uses: microsoft/[email protected]
+      - name: Build
+        shell: cmd
+        run: |
+          cd bx
+          ..\bx\tools\bin\windows\genie.exe vs2019
+          msbuild ".build/projects/vs2019/bx.sln" /m /v:minimal /p:Configuration=${{ matrix.config }} /p:Platform=${{ matrix.platform }}
+      - name: Check
+        shell: cmd
+        run: |
+          cd bx
+          dir /s ".build\${{ matrix.bindir }}\bin"
+          ".build\${{ matrix.bindir }}\bin\bx.test${{ matrix.config }}.exe"
+  mingw:
+    strategy:
+      fail-fast: true
+      matrix:
+        include: [
+          { msystem: MINGW64, project: 'mingw-gcc', bindir: 'win64_mingw-gcc' },
+          { msystem: CLANG64, project: 'mingw-clang', bindir: 'win64_mingw-clang' },
+        ]
+    name: mingw-${{ matrix.msystem }}
+    runs-on: windows-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Checkout bx
+        uses: actions/checkout@v3
+        with:
+          repository: bkaradzic/bx
+          path: bx
+      - name: Prepare
+        uses: msys2/setup-msys2@v2
+        with:
+          msystem: ${{ matrix.msystem }}
+          update: true
+          install: make
+          pacboy: cc:p
+      - name: Build
+        shell: msys2 {0}
+        run: |
+          cd bx
+          make ${{ matrix.project }}-release64 -j$(nproc) AR=ar CC=cc CXX=c++ MINGW=$MINGW_PREFIX
+      - name: Check
+        shell: cmd
+        run: |
+          cd bx
+          dir /s ".build\${{ matrix.bindir }}\bin"
+          ".build\${{ matrix.bindir }}\bin\bx.testRelease.exe" --version
+  linux:
+    strategy:
+      fail-fast: true
+      matrix:
+        include: [
+          { config: debug, binsuffix: Debug },
+          { config: release, binsuffix: Release },
+        ]
+    name: linux-${{ matrix.config }}64
+    runs-on: ubuntu-22.04
+    steps:
+      - name: Checkout bx
+        uses: actions/checkout@v3
+        with:
+          repository: bkaradzic/bx
+          path: bx
+      - name: Build
+        run: |
+          sudo apt install libgl-dev
+          cd bx
+          make -j$(nproc) linux-${{ matrix.config }}64
+      - name: Check
+        run: |
+          cd bx
+          ls -lash ".build/linux64_gcc/bin"
+          ".build/linux64_gcc/bin/bx.test${{ matrix.binsuffix}}"
+  osx:
+    strategy:
+      fail-fast: true
+      matrix:
+        include: [
+          { config: debug, binsuffix: Debug },
+          { config: release, binsuffix: Release },
+        ]
+    name: osx-x64-${{ matrix.config }}
+    runs-on: macos-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Checkout bx
+        uses: actions/checkout@v3
+        with:
+          repository: bkaradzic/bx
+          path: bx
+      - name: Build
+        run: |
+          cd bx
+          make -j$(sysctl -n hw.physicalcpu) osx-x64-${{ matrix.config }}
+      - name: Check
+        run: |
+          cd bx
+          ls -lash ".build/osx-x64/bin"
+          ".build/osx-x64/bin/bx.test${{ matrix.binsuffix}}"
+  android:
+    strategy:
+      fail-fast: true
+      matrix:
+        include: [
+          { platform: arm64  },
+        ]
+    name: android-${{ matrix.platform }}
+    runs-on: ubuntu-22.04
+    steps:
+      - uses: nttld/setup-ndk@v1
+        id: setup-ndk
+        with:
+          ndk-version: r25b
+          add-to-path: false
+      - name: Checkout bx
+        uses: actions/checkout@v3
+        with:
+          repository: bkaradzic/bx
+          path: bx
+      - name: Build
+        run: |
+          cd bx
+          make -j$(sysctl -n hw.physicalcpu) android-${{ matrix.platform }}
+        env:
+          ANDROID_NDK_ROOT: ${{ steps.setup-ndk.outputs.ndk-path }}
+      - name: Check
+        run: |
+          cd bx
+          ls -lash ".build/android-${{ matrix.platform }}/bin"

makefile

@@ -1,238 +0,0 @@
-#
-# Copyright 2011-2024 Branimir Karadzic. All rights reserved.
-# License: https://github.com/bkaradzic/bx/blob/master/LICENSE
-#
-
-GENIE=../bx/tools/bin/$(OS)/genie
-
-all:
-	$(GENIE)                       vs2017
-	$(GENIE)                       vs2019
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=android-arm     gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=android-arm64   gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=android-x86     gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=mingw-gcc       gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=linux-gcc       gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=haiku           gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=osx-x64         gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=osx-arm64       gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=ios-arm         gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=ios-simulator   gmake
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=tvos-simulator  gmake
-	$(GENIE)                       xcode8
-
-.build/projects/gmake-android-arm:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=android-arm gmake
-android-arm-debug: .build/projects/gmake-android-arm
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-android-arm config=debug
-android-arm-release: .build/projects/gmake-android-arm
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-android-arm config=release
-android-arm: android-arm-debug android-arm-release
-
-.build/projects/gmake-android-arm64:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=android-arm64 gmake
-android-arm64-debug: .build/projects/gmake-android-arm64
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-android-arm64 config=debug
-android-arm64-release: .build/projects/gmake-android-arm64
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-android-arm64 config=release
-android-arm64: android-arm64-debug android-arm64-release
-
-.build/projects/gmake-android-x86:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=android-x86 gmake
-android-x86-debug: .build/projects/gmake-android-x86
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-android-x86 config=debug
-android-x86-release: .build/projects/gmake-android-x86
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-android-x86 config=release
-android-x86: android-x86-debug android-x86-release
-
-.build/projects/gmake-linux:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=linux-gcc gmake
-linux-debug64: .build/projects/gmake-linux
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-linux config=debug64
-linux-release64: .build/projects/gmake-linux
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-linux config=release64
-linux: linux-debug64 linux-release64
-
-.build/projects/gmake-haiku:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=haiku gmake
-haiku-debug64: .build/projects/gmake-haiku
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-haiku config=debug64
-haiku-release64: .build/projects/gmake-haiku
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-haiku config=release64
-haiku: haiku-debug64 haiku-release64
-
-.build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=mingw-gcc gmake
-mingw-gcc-debug32: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc config=debug32
-mingw-gcc-release32: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc config=release32
-mingw-gcc-debug64: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc config=debug64
-mingw-gcc-release64: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc config=release64
-mingw-gcc: mingw-gcc-debug32 mingw-gcc-release32 mingw-gcc-debug64 mingw-gcc-release64
-
-.build/projects/gmake-mingw-clang:
-	$(GENIE) --clang=mingw-clang gmake
-mingw-clang-debug32: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-clang
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-clang config=debug32
-mingw-clang-release32: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-clang
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-clang config=release32
-mingw-clang-debug64: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-clang
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-clang config=debug64
-mingw-clang-release64: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-clang
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-clang config=release64
-mingw-clang: mingw-clang-debug32 mingw-clang-release32 mingw-clang-debug64 mingw-clang-release64
-
-.build/projects/vs2017:
-	$(GENIE) vs2017
-
-.build/projects/gmake-osx-x64:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=osx-x64 gmake
-osx-x64-debug: .build/projects/gmake-osx-x64
-	make -C .build/projects/gmake-osx-x64 config=debug
-osx-x64-release: .build/projects/gmake-osx-x64
-	make -C .build/projects/gmake-osx-x64 config=release
-osx-x64: osx-x64-debug osx-x64-release
-
-.build/projects/gmake-osx-arm64:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=osx-arm64 gmake
-osx-arm64-debug: .build/projects/gmake-osx-arm64
-	make -C .build/projects/gmake-osx-arm64 config=debug
-osx-arm64-release: .build/projects/gmake-osx-arm64
-	make -C .build/projects/gmake-osx-arm64 config=release
-osx-arm64: osx-arm64-debug osx-arm64-release
-
-.build/projects/gmake-ios-arm:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=ios-arm gmake
-ios-arm-debug: .build/projects/gmake-ios-arm
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-ios-arm config=debug
-ios-arm-release: .build/projects/gmake-ios-arm
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-ios-arm config=release
-ios-arm: ios-arm-debug ios-arm-release
-
-.build/projects/gmake-ios-simulator:
-	$(GENIE) --gcc=ios-simulator gmake
-ios-simulator-debug: .build/projects/gmake-ios-simulator
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-ios-simulator config=debug
-ios-simulator-release: .build/projects/gmake-ios-simulator
-	make -R -C .build/projects/gmake-ios-simulator config=release
-ios-simulator: ios-simulator-debug ios-simulator-release
-
-rebuild-shaders:
-	make -R -C examples rebuild
-
-analyze:
-	cppcheck src/
-	cppcheck examples/
-
-docs:
-	doxygen scripts/bgfx.doxygen
-	markdown README.md > .build/docs/readme.html
-
-clean:
-	@echo Cleaning...
-	-@rm -rf .build
-	@mkdir .build
-
-###
-
-SILENT ?= @
-
-UNAME := $(shell uname)
-ifeq ($(UNAME),$(filter $(UNAME),Linux GNU Darwin Haiku))
-ifeq ($(UNAME),$(filter $(UNAME),Darwin Haiku))
-ifeq ($(UNAME),$(filter $(UNAME),Darwin))
-OS=darwin
-BUILD_PROJECT_DIR=gmake-osx-x64
-BUILD_OUTPUT_DIR=osx-x64
-BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG=release
-EXE=
-else
-OS=haiku
-BUILD_PROJECT_DIR=gmake-haiku
-BUILD_OUTPUT_DIR=haiku64_gcc
-BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG=release64
-EXE=
-endif
-else
-OS=linux
-BUILD_PROJECT_DIR=gmake-linux
-BUILD_OUTPUT_DIR=linux64_gcc
-BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG=release64
-EXE=
-endif
-else
-OS=windows
-BUILD_PROJECT_DIR=gmake-mingw-gcc
-BUILD_OUTPUT_DIR=win32_mingw-gcc
-BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG=release64
-EXE=.exe
-endif
-
-# bin2c
-.build/osx-x64/bin/bin2cRelease: .build/projects/gmake-osx-x64
-	$(SILENT) make -C .build/projects/gmake-osx-x64 bin2c config=$(BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG)
-
-tools/bin/darwin/bin2c: .build/osx-x64/bin/bin2cRelease
-	$(SILENT) cp $(<) $(@)
-
-.build/linux64_gcc/bin/bin2cRelease: .build/projects/gmake-linux
-	$(SILENT) make -C .build/projects/gmake-linux bin2c config=$(BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG)
-
-tools/bin/linux/bin2c: .build/linux64_gcc/bin/bin2cRelease
-	$(SILENT) cp $(<) $(@)
-
-.build/haiku64_gcc/bin/bin2cRelease: .build/projects/gmake-haiku
-	$(SILENT) make -C .build/projects/gmake-haiku bin2c config=$(BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG)
-
-tools/bin/haiku/bin2c: .build/haiku64_gcc/bin/bin2cRelease
-	$(SILENT) cp $(<) $(@)
-
-.build/win64_mingw-gcc/bin/bin2cRelease.exe: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc
-	$(SILENT) make -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc bin2c config=$(BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG)
-
-tools/bin/windows/bin2c.exe: .build/win64_mingw-gcc/bin/bin2cRelease.exe
-	$(SILENT) cp $(<) $(@)
-
-bin2c: tools/bin/$(OS)/bin2c$(EXE)
-
-# lemon
-.build/osx-x64/bin/lemonRelease: .build/projects/gmake-osx-x64
-	$(SILENT) make -C .build/projects/gmake-osx-x64 lemon config=$(BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG)
-
-tools/bin/darwin/lemon: .build/osx-x64/bin/lemonRelease
-	$(SILENT) cp $(<) $(@)
-
-.build/linux64_gcc/bin/lemonRelease: .build/projects/gmake-linux
-	$(SILENT) make -C .build/projects/gmake-linux lemon config=$(BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG)
-
-tools/bin/linux/lemon: .build/linux64_gcc/bin/lemonRelease
-	$(SILENT) cp $(<) $(@)
-
-.build/haiku64_gcc/bin/lemonRelease: .build/projects/gmake-haiku
-	$(SILENT) make -C .build/projects/gmake-haiku lemon config=$(BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG)
-
-tools/bin/haiku/lemon: .build/haiku64_gcc/bin/lemonRelease
-	$(SILENT) cp $(<) $(@)
-
-.build/win64_mingw-gcc/bin/lemonRelease.exe: .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc
-	$(SILENT) make -C .build/projects/gmake-mingw-gcc lemon config=$(BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG)
-
-tools/bin/windows/lemon.exe: .build/win64_mingw-gcc/bin/lemonRelease.exe
-	$(SILENT) cp $(<) $(@)
-
-tools/bin/$(OS)/lempar.c: tools/lemon/lempar.c
-	$(SILENT) cp $(<) $(@)
-
-lemon: tools/bin/$(OS)/lemon$(EXE) tools/bin/$(OS)/lempar.c
-
-tools: bin2c lemon
-
-dist: tools/bin/darwin/bin2c tools/bin/linux/bin2c tools/bin/windows/bin2c.exe tools/bin/haiku/bin2c
-
-.build/$(BUILD_OUTPUT_DIR)/bin/bx.testRelease$(EXE): .build/projects/$(BUILD_PROJECT_DIR)
-	$(SILENT) make -C .build/projects/$(BUILD_PROJECT_DIR) bx.test config=$(BUILD_TOOLS_CONFIG)
-
-test: .build/$(BUILD_OUTPUT_DIR)/bin/bx.testRelease$(EXE)

scripts/genie.lua

@@ -39,7 +39,6 @@ end
 
 dofile "bx.lua"
 dofile "bin2c.lua"
-dofile "lemon.lua"
 
 project "bx.test"
 	kind "ConsoleApp"

scripts/lemon.lua

@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
---
--- Copyright 2010-2024 Branimir Karadzic. All rights reserved.
--- License: https://github.com/bkaradzic/bx/blob/master/LICENSE
---
-
-project "lemon"
-	kind "ConsoleApp"
-
-	files {
-		path.join(BX_DIR, "tools/lemon/lemon.c")
-	}
-
-	configuration { "not vs*" }
-		buildoptions {
-			"-Wno-implicit-fallthrough",
-			"-Wno-sign-compare",
-			"-Wno-unused-parameter",
-		}
-
-	configuration {}
-
-	strip()

tools/bin/darwin/lempar.c

@@ -1,981 +0,0 @@
-/*
-** 2000-05-29
-**
-** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.  In place of
-** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
-**
-**    May you do good and not evil.
-**    May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
-**    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
-**
-*************************************************************************
-** Driver template for the LEMON parser generator.
-**
-** The "lemon" program processes an LALR(1) input grammar file, then uses
-** this template to construct a parser.  The "lemon" program inserts text
-** at each "%%" line.  Also, any "P-a-r-s-e" identifier prefix (without the
-** interstitial "-" characters) contained in this template is changed into
-** the value of the %name directive from the grammar.  Otherwise, the content
-** of this template is copied straight through into the generate parser
-** source file.
-**
-** The following is the concatenation of all %include directives from the
-** input grammar file:
-*/
-#include <stdio.h>
-/************ Begin %include sections from the grammar ************************/
-%%
-/**************** End of %include directives **********************************/
-/* These constants specify the various numeric values for terminal symbols
-** in a format understandable to "makeheaders".  This section is blank unless
-** "lemon" is run with the "-m" command-line option.
-***************** Begin makeheaders token definitions *************************/
-%%
-/**************** End makeheaders token definitions ***************************/
-
-/* The next sections is a series of control #defines.
-** various aspects of the generated parser.
-**    YYCODETYPE         is the data type used to store the integer codes
-**                       that represent terminal and non-terminal symbols.
-**                       "unsigned char" is used if there are fewer than
-**                       256 symbols.  Larger types otherwise.
-**    YYNOCODE           is a number of type YYCODETYPE that is not used for
-**                       any terminal or nonterminal symbol.
-**    YYFALLBACK         If defined, this indicates that one or more tokens
-**                       (also known as: "terminal symbols") have fall-back
-**                       values which should be used if the original symbol
-**                       would not parse.  This permits keywords to sometimes
-**                       be used as identifiers, for example.
-**    YYACTIONTYPE       is the data type used for "action codes" - numbers
-**                       that indicate what to do in response to the next
-**                       token.
-**    ParseTOKENTYPE     is the data type used for minor type for terminal
-**                       symbols.  Background: A "minor type" is a semantic
-**                       value associated with a terminal or non-terminal
-**                       symbols.  For example, for an "ID" terminal symbol,
-**                       the minor type might be the name of the identifier.
-**                       Each non-terminal can have a different minor type.
-**                       Terminal symbols all have the same minor type, though.
-**                       This macros defines the minor type for terminal 
-**                       symbols.
-**    YYMINORTYPE        is the data type used for all minor types.
-**                       This is typically a union of many types, one of
-**                       which is ParseTOKENTYPE.  The entry in the union
-**                       for terminal symbols is called "yy0".
-**    YYSTACKDEPTH       is the maximum depth of the parser's stack.  If
-**                       zero the stack is dynamically sized using realloc()
-**    ParseARG_SDECL     A static variable declaration for the %extra_argument
-**    ParseARG_PDECL     A parameter declaration for the %extra_argument
-**    ParseARG_STORE     Code to store %extra_argument into yypParser
-**    ParseARG_FETCH     Code to extract %extra_argument from yypParser
-**    YYERRORSYMBOL      is the code number of the error symbol.  If not
-**                       defined, then do no error processing.
-**    YYNSTATE           the combined number of states.
-**    YYNRULE            the number of rules in the grammar
-**    YY_MAX_SHIFT       Maximum value for shift actions
-**    YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE Minimum value for shift-reduce actions
-**    YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE Maximum value for shift-reduce actions
-**    YY_MIN_REDUCE      Minimum value for reduce actions
-**    YY_MAX_REDUCE      Maximum value for reduce actions
-**    YY_ERROR_ACTION    The yy_action[] code for syntax error
-**    YY_ACCEPT_ACTION   The yy_action[] code for accept
-**    YY_NO_ACTION       The yy_action[] code for no-op
-*/
-#ifndef INTERFACE
-# define INTERFACE 1
-#endif
-/************* Begin control #defines *****************************************/
-%%
-/************* End control #defines *******************************************/
-
-/* Define the yytestcase() macro to be a no-op if is not already defined
-** otherwise.
-**
-** Applications can choose to define yytestcase() in the %include section
-** to a macro that can assist in verifying code coverage.  For production
-** code the yytestcase() macro should be turned off.  But it is useful
-** for testing.
-*/
-#ifndef yytestcase
-# define yytestcase(X)
-#endif
-
-
-/* Next are the tables used to determine what action to take based on the
-** current state and lookahead token.  These tables are used to implement
-** functions that take a state number and lookahead value and return an
-** action integer.  
-**
-** Suppose the action integer is N.  Then the action is determined as
-** follows
-**
-**   0 <= N <= YY_MAX_SHIFT             Shift N.  That is, push the lookahead
-**                                      token onto the stack and goto state N.
-**
-**   N between YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE       Shift to an arbitrary state then
-**     and YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE           reduce by rule N-YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE.
-**
-**   N between YY_MIN_REDUCE            Reduce by rule N-YY_MIN_REDUCE
-**     and YY_MAX_REDUCE
-**
-**   N == YY_ERROR_ACTION               A syntax error has occurred.
-**
-**   N == YY_ACCEPT_ACTION              The parser accepts its input.
-**
-**   N == YY_NO_ACTION                  No such action.  Denotes unused
-**                                      slots in the yy_action[] table.
-**
-** The action table is constructed as a single large table named yy_action[].
-** Given state S and lookahead X, the action is computed as either:
-**
-**    (A)   N = yy_action[ yy_shift_ofst[S] + X ]
-**    (B)   N = yy_default[S]
-**
-** The (A) formula is preferred.  The B formula is used instead if:
-**    (1)  The yy_shift_ofst[S]+X value is out of range, or
-**    (2)  yy_lookahead[yy_shift_ofst[S]+X] is not equal to X, or
-**    (3)  yy_shift_ofst[S] equal YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT.
-** (Implementation note: YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT is chosen so that
-** YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT+X will be out of range for all possible lookaheads X.
-** Hence only tests (1) and (2) need to be evaluated.)
-**
-** The formulas above are for computing the action when the lookahead is
-** a terminal symbol.  If the lookahead is a non-terminal (as occurs after
-** a reduce action) then the yy_reduce_ofst[] array is used in place of
-** the yy_shift_ofst[] array and YY_REDUCE_USE_DFLT is used in place of
-** YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT.
-**
-** The following are the tables generated in this section:
-**
-**  yy_action[]        A single table containing all actions.
-**  yy_lookahead[]     A table containing the lookahead for each entry in
-**                     yy_action.  Used to detect hash collisions.
-**  yy_shift_ofst[]    For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-**                     shifting terminals.
-**  yy_reduce_ofst[]   For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-**                     shifting non-terminals after a reduce.
-**  yy_default[]       Default action for each state.
-**
-*********** Begin parsing tables **********************************************/
-%%
-/********** End of lemon-generated parsing tables *****************************/
-
-/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.  
-** If a construct like the following:
-** 
-**      %fallback ID X Y Z.
-**
-** appears in the grammar, then ID becomes a fallback token for X, Y,
-** and Z.  Whenever one of the tokens X, Y, or Z is input to the parser
-** but it does not parse, the type of the token is changed to ID and
-** the parse is retried before an error is thrown.
-**
-** This feature can be used, for example, to cause some keywords in a language
-** to revert to identifiers if they keyword does not apply in the context where
-** it appears.
-*/
-#ifdef YYFALLBACK
-static const YYCODETYPE yyFallback[] = {
-%%
-};
-#endif /* YYFALLBACK */
-
-/* The following structure represents a single element of the
-** parser's stack.  Information stored includes:
-**
-**   +  The state number for the parser at this level of the stack.
-**
-**   +  The value of the token stored at this level of the stack.
-**      (In other words, the "major" token.)
-**
-**   +  The semantic value stored at this level of the stack.  This is
-**      the information used by the action routines in the grammar.
-**      It is sometimes called the "minor" token.
-**
-** After the "shift" half of a SHIFTREDUCE action, the stateno field
-** actually contains the reduce action for the second half of the
-** SHIFTREDUCE.
-*/
-struct yyStackEntry {
-  YYACTIONTYPE stateno;  /* The state-number, or reduce action in SHIFTREDUCE */
-  YYCODETYPE major;      /* The major token value.  This is the code
-                         ** number for the token at this stack level */
-  YYMINORTYPE minor;     /* The user-supplied minor token value.  This
-                         ** is the value of the token  */
-};
-typedef struct yyStackEntry yyStackEntry;
-
-/* The state of the parser is completely contained in an instance of
-** the following structure */
-struct yyParser {
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;          /* Pointer to top element of the stack */
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  int yyhwm;                    /* High-water mark of the stack */
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  int yyerrcnt;                 /* Shifts left before out of the error */
-#endif
-  ParseARG_SDECL                /* A place to hold %extra_argument */
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  int yystksz;                  /* Current side of the stack */
-  yyStackEntry *yystack;        /* The parser's stack */
-  yyStackEntry yystk0;          /* First stack entry */
-#else
-  yyStackEntry yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH];  /* The parser's stack */
-  yyStackEntry *yystackEnd;            /* Last entry in the stack */
-#endif
-};
-typedef struct yyParser yyParser;
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-#include <stdio.h>
-static FILE *yyTraceFILE = 0;
-static char *yyTracePrompt = 0;
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* 
-** Turn parser tracing on by giving a stream to which to write the trace
-** and a prompt to preface each trace message.  Tracing is turned off
-** by making either argument NULL 
-**
-** Inputs:
-** <ul>
-** <li> A FILE* to which trace output should be written.
-**      If NULL, then tracing is turned off.
-** <li> A prefix string written at the beginning of every
-**      line of trace output.  If NULL, then tracing is
-**      turned off.
-** </ul>
-**
-** Outputs:
-** None.
-*/
-void ParseTrace(FILE *TraceFILE, char *zTracePrompt){
-  yyTraceFILE = TraceFILE;
-  yyTracePrompt = zTracePrompt;
-  if( yyTraceFILE==0 ) yyTracePrompt = 0;
-  else if( yyTracePrompt==0 ) yyTraceFILE = 0;
-}
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* For tracing shifts, the names of all terminals and nonterminals
-** are required.  The following table supplies these names */
-static const char *const yyTokenName[] = { 
-%%
-};
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* For tracing reduce actions, the names of all rules are required.
-*/
-static const char *const yyRuleName[] = {
-%%
-};
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-/*
-** Try to increase the size of the parser stack.  Return the number
-** of errors.  Return 0 on success.
-*/
-static int yyGrowStack(yyParser *p){
-  int newSize;
-  int idx;
-  yyStackEntry *pNew;
-
-  newSize = p->yystksz*2 + 100;
-  idx = p->yytos ? (int)(p->yytos - p->yystack) : 0;
-  if( p->yystack==&p->yystk0 ){
-    pNew = malloc(newSize*sizeof(pNew[0]));
-    if( pNew ) pNew[0] = p->yystk0;
-  }else{
-    pNew = realloc(p->yystack, newSize*sizeof(pNew[0]));
-  }
-  if( pNew ){
-    p->yystack = pNew;
-    p->yytos = &p->yystack[idx];
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-    if( yyTraceFILE ){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sStack grows from %d to %d entries.\n",
-              yyTracePrompt, p->yystksz, newSize);
-    }
-#endif
-    p->yystksz = newSize;
-  }
-  return pNew==0; 
-}
-#endif
-
-/* Datatype of the argument to the memory allocated passed as the
-** second argument to ParseAlloc() below.  This can be changed by
-** putting an appropriate #define in the %include section of the input
-** grammar.
-*/
-#ifndef YYMALLOCARGTYPE
-# define YYMALLOCARGTYPE size_t
-#endif
-
-/* Initialize a new parser that has already been allocated.
-*/
-void ParseInit(void *yypParser){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)yypParser;
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  pParser->yyhwm = 0;
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  pParser->yytos = NULL;
-  pParser->yystack = NULL;
-  pParser->yystksz = 0;
-  if( yyGrowStack(pParser) ){
-    pParser->yystack = &pParser->yystk0;
-    pParser->yystksz = 1;
-  }
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  pParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-  pParser->yytos = pParser->yystack;
-  pParser->yystack[0].stateno = 0;
-  pParser->yystack[0].major = 0;
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
-  pParser->yystackEnd = &pParser->yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH-1];
-#endif
-}
-
-#ifndef Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
-** This function allocates a new parser.
-** The only argument is a pointer to a function which works like
-** malloc.
-**
-** Inputs:
-** A pointer to the function used to allocate memory.
-**
-** Outputs:
-** A pointer to a parser.  This pointer is used in subsequent calls
-** to Parse and ParseFree.
-*/
-void *ParseAlloc(void *(*mallocProc)(YYMALLOCARGTYPE)){
-  yyParser *pParser;
-  pParser = (yyParser*)(*mallocProc)( (YYMALLOCARGTYPE)sizeof(yyParser) );
-  if( pParser ) ParseInit(pParser);
-  return pParser;
-}
-#endif /* Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK */
-
-
-/* The following function deletes the "minor type" or semantic value
-** associated with a symbol.  The symbol can be either a terminal
-** or nonterminal. "yymajor" is the symbol code, and "yypminor" is
-** a pointer to the value to be deleted.  The code used to do the 
-** deletions is derived from the %destructor and/or %token_destructor
-** directives of the input grammar.
-*/
-static void yy_destructor(
-  yyParser *yypParser,    /* The parser */
-  YYCODETYPE yymajor,     /* Type code for object to destroy */
-  YYMINORTYPE *yypminor   /* The object to be destroyed */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-  switch( yymajor ){
-    /* Here is inserted the actions which take place when a
-    ** terminal or non-terminal is destroyed.  This can happen
-    ** when the symbol is popped from the stack during a
-    ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is 
-    ** being destroyed before it is finished parsing.
-    **
-    ** Note: during a reduce, the only symbols destroyed are those
-    ** which appear on the RHS of the rule, but which are *not* used
-    ** inside the C code.
-    */
-/********* Begin destructor definitions ***************************************/
-%%
-/********* End destructor definitions *****************************************/
-    default:  break;   /* If no destructor action specified: do nothing */
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** Pop the parser's stack once.
-**
-** If there is a destructor routine associated with the token which
-** is popped from the stack, then call it.
-*/
-static void yy_pop_parser_stack(yyParser *pParser){
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;
-  assert( pParser->yytos!=0 );
-  assert( pParser->yytos > pParser->yystack );
-  yytos = pParser->yytos--;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sPopping %s\n",
-      yyTracePrompt,
-      yyTokenName[yytos->major]);
-  }
-#endif
-  yy_destructor(pParser, yytos->major, &yytos->minor);
-}
-
-/*
-** Clear all secondary memory allocations from the parser
-*/
-void ParseFinalize(void *p){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)p;
-  while( pParser->yytos>pParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(pParser);
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  if( pParser->yystack!=&pParser->yystk0 ) free(pParser->yystack);
-#endif
-}
-
-#ifndef Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
-** Deallocate and destroy a parser.  Destructors are called for
-** all stack elements before shutting the parser down.
-**
-** If the YYPARSEFREENEVERNULL macro exists (for example because it
-** is defined in a %include section of the input grammar) then it is
-** assumed that the input pointer is never NULL.
-*/
-void ParseFree(
-  void *p,                    /* The parser to be deleted */
-  void (*freeProc)(void*)     /* Function used to reclaim memory */
-){
-#ifndef YYPARSEFREENEVERNULL
-  if( p==0 ) return;
-#endif
-  ParseFinalize(p);
-  (*freeProc)(p);
-}
-#endif /* Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK */
-
-/*
-** Return the peak depth of the stack for a parser.
-*/
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-int ParseStackPeak(void *p){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)p;
-  return pParser->yyhwm;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*
-** Find the appropriate action for a parser given the terminal
-** look-ahead token iLookAhead.
-*/
-static unsigned int yy_find_shift_action(
-  yyParser *pParser,        /* The parser */
-  YYCODETYPE iLookAhead     /* The look-ahead token */
-){
-  int i;
-  int stateno = pParser->yytos->stateno;
- 
-  if( stateno>=YY_MIN_REDUCE ) return stateno;
-  assert( stateno <= YY_SHIFT_COUNT );
-  do{
-    i = yy_shift_ofst[stateno];
-    assert( iLookAhead!=YYNOCODE );
-    i += iLookAhead;
-    if( i<0 || i>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT || yy_lookahead[i]!=iLookAhead ){
-#ifdef YYFALLBACK
-      YYCODETYPE iFallback;            /* Fallback token */
-      if( iLookAhead<sizeof(yyFallback)/sizeof(yyFallback[0])
-             && (iFallback = yyFallback[iLookAhead])!=0 ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-        if( yyTraceFILE ){
-          fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sFALLBACK %s => %s\n",
-             yyTracePrompt, yyTokenName[iLookAhead], yyTokenName[iFallback]);
-        }
-#endif
-        assert( yyFallback[iFallback]==0 ); /* Fallback loop must terminate */
-        iLookAhead = iFallback;
-        continue;
-      }
-#endif
-#ifdef YYWILDCARD
-      {
-        int j = i - iLookAhead + YYWILDCARD;
-        if( 
-#if YY_SHIFT_MIN+YYWILDCARD<0
-          j>=0 &&
-#endif
-#if YY_SHIFT_MAX+YYWILDCARD>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT
-          j<YY_ACTTAB_COUNT &&
-#endif
-          yy_lookahead[j]==YYWILDCARD && iLookAhead>0
-        ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-          if( yyTraceFILE ){
-            fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sWILDCARD %s => %s\n",
-               yyTracePrompt, yyTokenName[iLookAhead],
-               yyTokenName[YYWILDCARD]);
-          }
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-          return yy_action[j];
-        }
-      }
-#endif /* YYWILDCARD */
-      return yy_default[stateno];
-    }else{
-      return yy_action[i];
-    }
-  }while(1);
-}
-
-/*
-** Find the appropriate action for a parser given the non-terminal
-** look-ahead token iLookAhead.
-*/
-static int yy_find_reduce_action(
-  int stateno,              /* Current state number */
-  YYCODETYPE iLookAhead     /* The look-ahead token */
-){
-  int i;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  if( stateno>YY_REDUCE_COUNT ){
-    return yy_default[stateno];
-  }
-#else
-  assert( stateno<=YY_REDUCE_COUNT );
-#endif
-  i = yy_reduce_ofst[stateno];
-  assert( i!=YY_REDUCE_USE_DFLT );
-  assert( iLookAhead!=YYNOCODE );
-  i += iLookAhead;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  if( i<0 || i>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT || yy_lookahead[i]!=iLookAhead ){
-    return yy_default[stateno];
-  }
-#else
-  assert( i>=0 && i<YY_ACTTAB_COUNT );
-  assert( yy_lookahead[i]==iLookAhead );
-#endif
-  return yy_action[i];
-}
-
-/*
-** The following routine is called if the stack overflows.
-*/
-static void yyStackOverflow(yyParser *yypParser){
-   ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-   if( yyTraceFILE ){
-     fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sStack Overflow!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-   }
-#endif
-   while( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-   /* Here code is inserted which will execute if the parser
-   ** stack every overflows */
-/******** Begin %stack_overflow code ******************************************/
-%%
-/******** End %stack_overflow code ********************************************/
-   ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument var */
-}
-
-/*
-** Print tracing information for a SHIFT action
-*/
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-static void yyTraceShift(yyParser *yypParser, int yyNewState){
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    if( yyNewState<YYNSTATE ){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sShift '%s', go to state %d\n",
-         yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yypParser->yytos->major],
-         yyNewState);
-    }else{
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sShift '%s'\n",
-         yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yypParser->yytos->major]);
-    }
-  }
-}
-#else
-# define yyTraceShift(X,Y)
-#endif
-
-/*
-** Perform a shift action.
-*/
-static void yy_shift(
-  yyParser *yypParser,          /* The parser to be shifted */
-  int yyNewState,               /* The new state to shift in */
-  int yyMajor,                  /* The major token to shift in */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyMinor        /* The minor token to shift in */
-){
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;
-  yypParser->yytos++;
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  if( (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack)>yypParser->yyhwm ){
-    yypParser->yyhwm++;
-    assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack) );
-  }
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
-  if( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystackEnd ){
-    yypParser->yytos--;
-    yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-    return;
-  }
-#else
-  if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yystksz] ){
-    if( yyGrowStack(yypParser) ){
-      yypParser->yytos--;
-      yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-      return;
-    }
-  }
-#endif
-  if( yyNewState > YY_MAX_SHIFT ){
-    yyNewState += YY_MIN_REDUCE - YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE;
-  }
-  yytos = yypParser->yytos;
-  yytos->stateno = (YYACTIONTYPE)yyNewState;
-  yytos->major = (YYCODETYPE)yyMajor;
-  yytos->minor.yy0 = yyMinor;
-  yyTraceShift(yypParser, yyNewState);
-}
-
-/* The following table contains information about every rule that
-** is used during the reduce.
-*/
-static const struct {
-  YYCODETYPE lhs;       /* Symbol on the left-hand side of the rule */
-  signed char nrhs;     /* Negative of the number of RHS symbols in the rule */
-} yyRuleInfo[] = {
-%%
-};
-
-static void yy_accept(yyParser*);  /* Forward Declaration */
-
-/*
-** Perform a reduce action and the shift that must immediately
-** follow the reduce.
-**
-** The yyLookahead and yyLookaheadToken parameters provide reduce actions
-** access to the lookahead token (if any).  The yyLookahead will be YYNOCODE
-** if the lookahead token has already been consumed.  As this procedure is
-** only called from one place, optimizing compilers will in-line it, which
-** means that the extra parameters have no performance impact.
-*/
-static void yy_reduce(
-  yyParser *yypParser,         /* The parser */
-  unsigned int yyruleno,       /* Number of the rule by which to reduce */
-  int yyLookahead,             /* Lookahead token, or YYNOCODE if none */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyLookaheadToken  /* Value of the lookahead token */
-){
-  int yygoto;                     /* The next state */
-  int yyact;                      /* The next action */
-  yyStackEntry *yymsp;            /* The top of the parser's stack */
-  int yysize;                     /* Amount to pop the stack */
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-  yymsp = yypParser->yytos;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE && yyruleno<(int)(sizeof(yyRuleName)/sizeof(yyRuleName[0])) ){
-    yysize = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs;
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sReduce [%s], go to state %d.\n", yyTracePrompt,
-      yyRuleName[yyruleno], yymsp[yysize].stateno);
-  }
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-  /* Check that the stack is large enough to grow by a single entry
-  ** if the RHS of the rule is empty.  This ensures that there is room
-  ** enough on the stack to push the LHS value */
-  if( yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs==0 ){
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-    if( (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack)>yypParser->yyhwm ){
-      yypParser->yyhwm++;
-      assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack));
-    }
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
-    if( yypParser->yytos>=yypParser->yystackEnd ){
-      yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-      return;
-    }
-#else
-    if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yystksz-1] ){
-      if( yyGrowStack(yypParser) ){
-        yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-        return;
-      }
-      yymsp = yypParser->yytos;
-    }
-#endif
-  }
-
-  switch( yyruleno ){
-  /* Beginning here are the reduction cases.  A typical example
-  ** follows:
-  **   case 0:
-  **  #line <lineno> <grammarfile>
-  **     { ... }           // User supplied code
-  **  #line <lineno> <thisfile>
-  **     break;
-  */
-/********** Begin reduce actions **********************************************/
-%%
-/********** End reduce actions ************************************************/
-  };
-  assert( yyruleno<sizeof(yyRuleInfo)/sizeof(yyRuleInfo[0]) );
-  yygoto = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].lhs;
-  yysize = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs;
-  yyact = yy_find_reduce_action(yymsp[yysize].stateno,(YYCODETYPE)yygoto);
-
-  /* There are no SHIFTREDUCE actions on nonterminals because the table
-  ** generator has simplified them to pure REDUCE actions. */
-  assert( !(yyact>YY_MAX_SHIFT && yyact<=YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE) );
-
-  /* It is not possible for a REDUCE to be followed by an error */
-  assert( yyact!=YY_ERROR_ACTION );
-
-  if( yyact==YY_ACCEPT_ACTION ){
-    yypParser->yytos += yysize;
-    yy_accept(yypParser);
-  }else{
-    yymsp += yysize+1;
-    yypParser->yytos = yymsp;
-    yymsp->stateno = (YYACTIONTYPE)yyact;
-    yymsp->major = (YYCODETYPE)yygoto;
-    yyTraceShift(yypParser, yyact);
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** The following code executes when the parse fails
-*/
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-static void yy_parse_failed(
-  yyParser *yypParser           /* The parser */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sFail!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-  }
-#endif
-  while( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-  /* Here code is inserted which will be executed whenever the
-  ** parser fails */
-/************ Begin %parse_failure code ***************************************/
-%%
-/************ End %parse_failure code *****************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-#endif /* YYNOERRORRECOVERY */
-
-/*
-** The following code executes when a syntax error first occurs.
-*/
-static void yy_syntax_error(
-  yyParser *yypParser,           /* The parser */
-  int yymajor,                   /* The major type of the error token */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyminor         /* The minor type of the error token */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#define TOKEN yyminor
-/************ Begin %syntax_error code ****************************************/
-%%
-/************ End %syntax_error code ******************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-
-/*
-** The following is executed when the parser accepts
-*/
-static void yy_accept(
-  yyParser *yypParser           /* The parser */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sAccept!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-  }
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-  assert( yypParser->yytos==yypParser->yystack );
-  /* Here code is inserted which will be executed whenever the
-  ** parser accepts */
-/*********** Begin %parse_accept code *****************************************/
-%%
-/*********** End %parse_accept code *******************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-
-/* The main parser program.
-** The first argument is a pointer to a structure obtained from
-** "ParseAlloc" which describes the current state of the parser.
-** The second argument is the major token number.  The third is
-** the minor token.  The fourth optional argument is whatever the
-** user wants (and specified in the grammar) and is available for
-** use by the action routines.
-**
-** Inputs:
-** <ul>
-** <li> A pointer to the parser (an opaque structure.)
-** <li> The major token number.
-** <li> The minor token number.
-** <li> An option argument of a grammar-specified type.
-** </ul>
-**
-** Outputs:
-** None.
-*/
-void Parse(
-  void *yyp,                   /* The parser */
-  int yymajor,                 /* The major token code number */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyminor       /* The value for the token */
-  ParseARG_PDECL               /* Optional %extra_argument parameter */
-){
-  YYMINORTYPE yyminorunion;
-  unsigned int yyact;   /* The parser action. */
-#if !defined(YYERRORSYMBOL) && !defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-  int yyendofinput;     /* True if we are at the end of input */
-#endif
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  int yyerrorhit = 0;   /* True if yymajor has invoked an error */
-#endif
-  yyParser *yypParser;  /* The parser */
-
-  yypParser = (yyParser*)yyp;
-  assert( yypParser->yytos!=0 );
-#if !defined(YYERRORSYMBOL) && !defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-  yyendofinput = (yymajor==0);
-#endif
-  ParseARG_STORE;
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sInput '%s'\n",yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yymajor]);
-  }
-#endif
-
-  do{
-    yyact = yy_find_shift_action(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor);
-    if( yyact <= YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE ){
-      yy_shift(yypParser,yyact,yymajor,yyminor);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt--;
-#endif
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-    }else if( yyact <= YY_MAX_REDUCE ){
-      yy_reduce(yypParser,yyact-YY_MIN_REDUCE,yymajor,yyminor);
-    }else{
-      assert( yyact == YY_ERROR_ACTION );
-      yyminorunion.yy0 = yyminor;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-      int yymx;
-#endif
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-      if( yyTraceFILE ){
-        fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sSyntax Error!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-      }
-#endif
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-      /* A syntax error has occurred.
-      ** The response to an error depends upon whether or not the
-      ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".  
-      **
-      ** This is what we do if the grammar does define ERROR:
-      **
-      **  * Call the %syntax_error function.
-      **
-      **  * Begin popping the stack until we enter a state where
-      **    it is legal to shift the error symbol, then shift
-      **    the error symbol.
-      **
-      **  * Set the error count to three.
-      **
-      **  * Begin accepting and shifting new tokens.  No new error
-      **    processing will occur until three tokens have been
-      **    shifted successfully.
-      **
-      */
-      if( yypParser->yyerrcnt<0 ){
-        yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor,yyminor);
-      }
-      yymx = yypParser->yytos->major;
-      if( yymx==YYERRORSYMBOL || yyerrorhit ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-        if( yyTraceFILE ){
-          fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sDiscard input token %s\n",
-             yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yymajor]);
-        }
-#endif
-        yy_destructor(yypParser, (YYCODETYPE)yymajor, &yyminorunion);
-        yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-      }else{
-        while( yypParser->yytos >= yypParser->yystack
-            && yymx != YYERRORSYMBOL
-            && (yyact = yy_find_reduce_action(
-                        yypParser->yytos->stateno,
-                        YYERRORSYMBOL)) >= YY_MIN_REDUCE
-        ){
-          yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-        }
-        if( yypParser->yytos < yypParser->yystack || yymajor==0 ){
-          yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-          yy_parse_failed(yypParser);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-          yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-          yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-        }else if( yymx!=YYERRORSYMBOL ){
-          yy_shift(yypParser,yyact,YYERRORSYMBOL,yyminor);
-        }
-      }
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt = 3;
-      yyerrorhit = 1;
-#elif defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-      /* If the YYNOERRORRECOVERY macro is defined, then do not attempt to
-      ** do any kind of error recovery.  Instead, simply invoke the syntax
-      ** error routine and continue going as if nothing had happened.
-      **
-      ** Applications can set this macro (for example inside %include) if
-      ** they intend to abandon the parse upon the first syntax error seen.
-      */
-      yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
-      yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-      
-#else  /* YYERRORSYMBOL is not defined */
-      /* This is what we do if the grammar does not define ERROR:
-      **
-      **  * Report an error message, and throw away the input token.
-      **
-      **  * If the input token is $, then fail the parse.
-      **
-      ** As before, subsequent error messages are suppressed until
-      ** three input tokens have been successfully shifted.
-      */
-      if( yypParser->yyerrcnt<=0 ){
-        yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
-      }
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt = 3;
-      yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-      if( yyendofinput ){
-        yy_parse_failed(yypParser);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-        yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-      }
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-#endif
-    }
-  }while( yymajor!=YYNOCODE && yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack );
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    yyStackEntry *i;
-    char cDiv = '[';
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sReturn. Stack=",yyTracePrompt);
-    for(i=&yypParser->yystack[1]; i<=yypParser->yytos; i++){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%c%s", cDiv, yyTokenName[i->major]);
-      cDiv = ' ';
-    }
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"]\n");
-  }
-#endif
-  return;
-}

tools/bin/linux/lempar.c

@@ -1,981 +0,0 @@
-/*
-** 2000-05-29
-**
-** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.  In place of
-** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
-**
-**    May you do good and not evil.
-**    May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
-**    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
-**
-*************************************************************************
-** Driver template for the LEMON parser generator.
-**
-** The "lemon" program processes an LALR(1) input grammar file, then uses
-** this template to construct a parser.  The "lemon" program inserts text
-** at each "%%" line.  Also, any "P-a-r-s-e" identifier prefix (without the
-** interstitial "-" characters) contained in this template is changed into
-** the value of the %name directive from the grammar.  Otherwise, the content
-** of this template is copied straight through into the generate parser
-** source file.
-**
-** The following is the concatenation of all %include directives from the
-** input grammar file:
-*/
-#include <stdio.h>
-/************ Begin %include sections from the grammar ************************/
-%%
-/**************** End of %include directives **********************************/
-/* These constants specify the various numeric values for terminal symbols
-** in a format understandable to "makeheaders".  This section is blank unless
-** "lemon" is run with the "-m" command-line option.
-***************** Begin makeheaders token definitions *************************/
-%%
-/**************** End makeheaders token definitions ***************************/
-
-/* The next sections is a series of control #defines.
-** various aspects of the generated parser.
-**    YYCODETYPE         is the data type used to store the integer codes
-**                       that represent terminal and non-terminal symbols.
-**                       "unsigned char" is used if there are fewer than
-**                       256 symbols.  Larger types otherwise.
-**    YYNOCODE           is a number of type YYCODETYPE that is not used for
-**                       any terminal or nonterminal symbol.
-**    YYFALLBACK         If defined, this indicates that one or more tokens
-**                       (also known as: "terminal symbols") have fall-back
-**                       values which should be used if the original symbol
-**                       would not parse.  This permits keywords to sometimes
-**                       be used as identifiers, for example.
-**    YYACTIONTYPE       is the data type used for "action codes" - numbers
-**                       that indicate what to do in response to the next
-**                       token.
-**    ParseTOKENTYPE     is the data type used for minor type for terminal
-**                       symbols.  Background: A "minor type" is a semantic
-**                       value associated with a terminal or non-terminal
-**                       symbols.  For example, for an "ID" terminal symbol,
-**                       the minor type might be the name of the identifier.
-**                       Each non-terminal can have a different minor type.
-**                       Terminal symbols all have the same minor type, though.
-**                       This macros defines the minor type for terminal 
-**                       symbols.
-**    YYMINORTYPE        is the data type used for all minor types.
-**                       This is typically a union of many types, one of
-**                       which is ParseTOKENTYPE.  The entry in the union
-**                       for terminal symbols is called "yy0".
-**    YYSTACKDEPTH       is the maximum depth of the parser's stack.  If
-**                       zero the stack is dynamically sized using realloc()
-**    ParseARG_SDECL     A static variable declaration for the %extra_argument
-**    ParseARG_PDECL     A parameter declaration for the %extra_argument
-**    ParseARG_STORE     Code to store %extra_argument into yypParser
-**    ParseARG_FETCH     Code to extract %extra_argument from yypParser
-**    YYERRORSYMBOL      is the code number of the error symbol.  If not
-**                       defined, then do no error processing.
-**    YYNSTATE           the combined number of states.
-**    YYNRULE            the number of rules in the grammar
-**    YY_MAX_SHIFT       Maximum value for shift actions
-**    YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE Minimum value for shift-reduce actions
-**    YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE Maximum value for shift-reduce actions
-**    YY_MIN_REDUCE      Minimum value for reduce actions
-**    YY_MAX_REDUCE      Maximum value for reduce actions
-**    YY_ERROR_ACTION    The yy_action[] code for syntax error
-**    YY_ACCEPT_ACTION   The yy_action[] code for accept
-**    YY_NO_ACTION       The yy_action[] code for no-op
-*/
-#ifndef INTERFACE
-# define INTERFACE 1
-#endif
-/************* Begin control #defines *****************************************/
-%%
-/************* End control #defines *******************************************/
-
-/* Define the yytestcase() macro to be a no-op if is not already defined
-** otherwise.
-**
-** Applications can choose to define yytestcase() in the %include section
-** to a macro that can assist in verifying code coverage.  For production
-** code the yytestcase() macro should be turned off.  But it is useful
-** for testing.
-*/
-#ifndef yytestcase
-# define yytestcase(X)
-#endif
-
-
-/* Next are the tables used to determine what action to take based on the
-** current state and lookahead token.  These tables are used to implement
-** functions that take a state number and lookahead value and return an
-** action integer.  
-**
-** Suppose the action integer is N.  Then the action is determined as
-** follows
-**
-**   0 <= N <= YY_MAX_SHIFT             Shift N.  That is, push the lookahead
-**                                      token onto the stack and goto state N.
-**
-**   N between YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE       Shift to an arbitrary state then
-**     and YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE           reduce by rule N-YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE.
-**
-**   N between YY_MIN_REDUCE            Reduce by rule N-YY_MIN_REDUCE
-**     and YY_MAX_REDUCE
-**
-**   N == YY_ERROR_ACTION               A syntax error has occurred.
-**
-**   N == YY_ACCEPT_ACTION              The parser accepts its input.
-**
-**   N == YY_NO_ACTION                  No such action.  Denotes unused
-**                                      slots in the yy_action[] table.
-**
-** The action table is constructed as a single large table named yy_action[].
-** Given state S and lookahead X, the action is computed as either:
-**
-**    (A)   N = yy_action[ yy_shift_ofst[S] + X ]
-**    (B)   N = yy_default[S]
-**
-** The (A) formula is preferred.  The B formula is used instead if:
-**    (1)  The yy_shift_ofst[S]+X value is out of range, or
-**    (2)  yy_lookahead[yy_shift_ofst[S]+X] is not equal to X, or
-**    (3)  yy_shift_ofst[S] equal YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT.
-** (Implementation note: YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT is chosen so that
-** YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT+X will be out of range for all possible lookaheads X.
-** Hence only tests (1) and (2) need to be evaluated.)
-**
-** The formulas above are for computing the action when the lookahead is
-** a terminal symbol.  If the lookahead is a non-terminal (as occurs after
-** a reduce action) then the yy_reduce_ofst[] array is used in place of
-** the yy_shift_ofst[] array and YY_REDUCE_USE_DFLT is used in place of
-** YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT.
-**
-** The following are the tables generated in this section:
-**
-**  yy_action[]        A single table containing all actions.
-**  yy_lookahead[]     A table containing the lookahead for each entry in
-**                     yy_action.  Used to detect hash collisions.
-**  yy_shift_ofst[]    For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-**                     shifting terminals.
-**  yy_reduce_ofst[]   For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-**                     shifting non-terminals after a reduce.
-**  yy_default[]       Default action for each state.
-**
-*********** Begin parsing tables **********************************************/
-%%
-/********** End of lemon-generated parsing tables *****************************/
-
-/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.  
-** If a construct like the following:
-** 
-**      %fallback ID X Y Z.
-**
-** appears in the grammar, then ID becomes a fallback token for X, Y,
-** and Z.  Whenever one of the tokens X, Y, or Z is input to the parser
-** but it does not parse, the type of the token is changed to ID and
-** the parse is retried before an error is thrown.
-**
-** This feature can be used, for example, to cause some keywords in a language
-** to revert to identifiers if they keyword does not apply in the context where
-** it appears.
-*/
-#ifdef YYFALLBACK
-static const YYCODETYPE yyFallback[] = {
-%%
-};
-#endif /* YYFALLBACK */
-
-/* The following structure represents a single element of the
-** parser's stack.  Information stored includes:
-**
-**   +  The state number for the parser at this level of the stack.
-**
-**   +  The value of the token stored at this level of the stack.
-**      (In other words, the "major" token.)
-**
-**   +  The semantic value stored at this level of the stack.  This is
-**      the information used by the action routines in the grammar.
-**      It is sometimes called the "minor" token.
-**
-** After the "shift" half of a SHIFTREDUCE action, the stateno field
-** actually contains the reduce action for the second half of the
-** SHIFTREDUCE.
-*/
-struct yyStackEntry {
-  YYACTIONTYPE stateno;  /* The state-number, or reduce action in SHIFTREDUCE */
-  YYCODETYPE major;      /* The major token value.  This is the code
-                         ** number for the token at this stack level */
-  YYMINORTYPE minor;     /* The user-supplied minor token value.  This
-                         ** is the value of the token  */
-};
-typedef struct yyStackEntry yyStackEntry;
-
-/* The state of the parser is completely contained in an instance of
-** the following structure */
-struct yyParser {
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;          /* Pointer to top element of the stack */
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  int yyhwm;                    /* High-water mark of the stack */
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  int yyerrcnt;                 /* Shifts left before out of the error */
-#endif
-  ParseARG_SDECL                /* A place to hold %extra_argument */
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  int yystksz;                  /* Current side of the stack */
-  yyStackEntry *yystack;        /* The parser's stack */
-  yyStackEntry yystk0;          /* First stack entry */
-#else
-  yyStackEntry yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH];  /* The parser's stack */
-  yyStackEntry *yystackEnd;            /* Last entry in the stack */
-#endif
-};
-typedef struct yyParser yyParser;
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-#include <stdio.h>
-static FILE *yyTraceFILE = 0;
-static char *yyTracePrompt = 0;
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* 
-** Turn parser tracing on by giving a stream to which to write the trace
-** and a prompt to preface each trace message.  Tracing is turned off
-** by making either argument NULL 
-**
-** Inputs:
-** <ul>
-** <li> A FILE* to which trace output should be written.
-**      If NULL, then tracing is turned off.
-** <li> A prefix string written at the beginning of every
-**      line of trace output.  If NULL, then tracing is
-**      turned off.
-** </ul>
-**
-** Outputs:
-** None.
-*/
-void ParseTrace(FILE *TraceFILE, char *zTracePrompt){
-  yyTraceFILE = TraceFILE;
-  yyTracePrompt = zTracePrompt;
-  if( yyTraceFILE==0 ) yyTracePrompt = 0;
-  else if( yyTracePrompt==0 ) yyTraceFILE = 0;
-}
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* For tracing shifts, the names of all terminals and nonterminals
-** are required.  The following table supplies these names */
-static const char *const yyTokenName[] = { 
-%%
-};
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* For tracing reduce actions, the names of all rules are required.
-*/
-static const char *const yyRuleName[] = {
-%%
-};
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-/*
-** Try to increase the size of the parser stack.  Return the number
-** of errors.  Return 0 on success.
-*/
-static int yyGrowStack(yyParser *p){
-  int newSize;
-  int idx;
-  yyStackEntry *pNew;
-
-  newSize = p->yystksz*2 + 100;
-  idx = p->yytos ? (int)(p->yytos - p->yystack) : 0;
-  if( p->yystack==&p->yystk0 ){
-    pNew = malloc(newSize*sizeof(pNew[0]));
-    if( pNew ) pNew[0] = p->yystk0;
-  }else{
-    pNew = realloc(p->yystack, newSize*sizeof(pNew[0]));
-  }
-  if( pNew ){
-    p->yystack = pNew;
-    p->yytos = &p->yystack[idx];
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-    if( yyTraceFILE ){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sStack grows from %d to %d entries.\n",
-              yyTracePrompt, p->yystksz, newSize);
-    }
-#endif
-    p->yystksz = newSize;
-  }
-  return pNew==0; 
-}
-#endif
-
-/* Datatype of the argument to the memory allocated passed as the
-** second argument to ParseAlloc() below.  This can be changed by
-** putting an appropriate #define in the %include section of the input
-** grammar.
-*/
-#ifndef YYMALLOCARGTYPE
-# define YYMALLOCARGTYPE size_t
-#endif
-
-/* Initialize a new parser that has already been allocated.
-*/
-void ParseInit(void *yypParser){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)yypParser;
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  pParser->yyhwm = 0;
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  pParser->yytos = NULL;
-  pParser->yystack = NULL;
-  pParser->yystksz = 0;
-  if( yyGrowStack(pParser) ){
-    pParser->yystack = &pParser->yystk0;
-    pParser->yystksz = 1;
-  }
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  pParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-  pParser->yytos = pParser->yystack;
-  pParser->yystack[0].stateno = 0;
-  pParser->yystack[0].major = 0;
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
-  pParser->yystackEnd = &pParser->yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH-1];
-#endif
-}
-
-#ifndef Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
-** This function allocates a new parser.
-** The only argument is a pointer to a function which works like
-** malloc.
-**
-** Inputs:
-** A pointer to the function used to allocate memory.
-**
-** Outputs:
-** A pointer to a parser.  This pointer is used in subsequent calls
-** to Parse and ParseFree.
-*/
-void *ParseAlloc(void *(*mallocProc)(YYMALLOCARGTYPE)){
-  yyParser *pParser;
-  pParser = (yyParser*)(*mallocProc)( (YYMALLOCARGTYPE)sizeof(yyParser) );
-  if( pParser ) ParseInit(pParser);
-  return pParser;
-}
-#endif /* Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK */
-
-
-/* The following function deletes the "minor type" or semantic value
-** associated with a symbol.  The symbol can be either a terminal
-** or nonterminal. "yymajor" is the symbol code, and "yypminor" is
-** a pointer to the value to be deleted.  The code used to do the 
-** deletions is derived from the %destructor and/or %token_destructor
-** directives of the input grammar.
-*/
-static void yy_destructor(
-  yyParser *yypParser,    /* The parser */
-  YYCODETYPE yymajor,     /* Type code for object to destroy */
-  YYMINORTYPE *yypminor   /* The object to be destroyed */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-  switch( yymajor ){
-    /* Here is inserted the actions which take place when a
-    ** terminal or non-terminal is destroyed.  This can happen
-    ** when the symbol is popped from the stack during a
-    ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is 
-    ** being destroyed before it is finished parsing.
-    **
-    ** Note: during a reduce, the only symbols destroyed are those
-    ** which appear on the RHS of the rule, but which are *not* used
-    ** inside the C code.
-    */
-/********* Begin destructor definitions ***************************************/
-%%
-/********* End destructor definitions *****************************************/
-    default:  break;   /* If no destructor action specified: do nothing */
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** Pop the parser's stack once.
-**
-** If there is a destructor routine associated with the token which
-** is popped from the stack, then call it.
-*/
-static void yy_pop_parser_stack(yyParser *pParser){
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;
-  assert( pParser->yytos!=0 );
-  assert( pParser->yytos > pParser->yystack );
-  yytos = pParser->yytos--;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sPopping %s\n",
-      yyTracePrompt,
-      yyTokenName[yytos->major]);
-  }
-#endif
-  yy_destructor(pParser, yytos->major, &yytos->minor);
-}
-
-/*
-** Clear all secondary memory allocations from the parser
-*/
-void ParseFinalize(void *p){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)p;
-  while( pParser->yytos>pParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(pParser);
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  if( pParser->yystack!=&pParser->yystk0 ) free(pParser->yystack);
-#endif
-}
-
-#ifndef Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
-** Deallocate and destroy a parser.  Destructors are called for
-** all stack elements before shutting the parser down.
-**
-** If the YYPARSEFREENEVERNULL macro exists (for example because it
-** is defined in a %include section of the input grammar) then it is
-** assumed that the input pointer is never NULL.
-*/
-void ParseFree(
-  void *p,                    /* The parser to be deleted */
-  void (*freeProc)(void*)     /* Function used to reclaim memory */
-){
-#ifndef YYPARSEFREENEVERNULL
-  if( p==0 ) return;
-#endif
-  ParseFinalize(p);
-  (*freeProc)(p);
-}
-#endif /* Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK */
-
-/*
-** Return the peak depth of the stack for a parser.
-*/
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-int ParseStackPeak(void *p){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)p;
-  return pParser->yyhwm;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*
-** Find the appropriate action for a parser given the terminal
-** look-ahead token iLookAhead.
-*/
-static unsigned int yy_find_shift_action(
-  yyParser *pParser,        /* The parser */
-  YYCODETYPE iLookAhead     /* The look-ahead token */
-){
-  int i;
-  int stateno = pParser->yytos->stateno;
- 
-  if( stateno>=YY_MIN_REDUCE ) return stateno;
-  assert( stateno <= YY_SHIFT_COUNT );
-  do{
-    i = yy_shift_ofst[stateno];
-    assert( iLookAhead!=YYNOCODE );
-    i += iLookAhead;
-    if( i<0 || i>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT || yy_lookahead[i]!=iLookAhead ){
-#ifdef YYFALLBACK
-      YYCODETYPE iFallback;            /* Fallback token */
-      if( iLookAhead<sizeof(yyFallback)/sizeof(yyFallback[0])
-             && (iFallback = yyFallback[iLookAhead])!=0 ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-        if( yyTraceFILE ){
-          fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sFALLBACK %s => %s\n",
-             yyTracePrompt, yyTokenName[iLookAhead], yyTokenName[iFallback]);
-        }
-#endif
-        assert( yyFallback[iFallback]==0 ); /* Fallback loop must terminate */
-        iLookAhead = iFallback;
-        continue;
-      }
-#endif
-#ifdef YYWILDCARD
-      {
-        int j = i - iLookAhead + YYWILDCARD;
-        if( 
-#if YY_SHIFT_MIN+YYWILDCARD<0
-          j>=0 &&
-#endif
-#if YY_SHIFT_MAX+YYWILDCARD>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT
-          j<YY_ACTTAB_COUNT &&
-#endif
-          yy_lookahead[j]==YYWILDCARD && iLookAhead>0
-        ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-          if( yyTraceFILE ){
-            fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sWILDCARD %s => %s\n",
-               yyTracePrompt, yyTokenName[iLookAhead],
-               yyTokenName[YYWILDCARD]);
-          }
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-          return yy_action[j];
-        }
-      }
-#endif /* YYWILDCARD */
-      return yy_default[stateno];
-    }else{
-      return yy_action[i];
-    }
-  }while(1);
-}
-
-/*
-** Find the appropriate action for a parser given the non-terminal
-** look-ahead token iLookAhead.
-*/
-static int yy_find_reduce_action(
-  int stateno,              /* Current state number */
-  YYCODETYPE iLookAhead     /* The look-ahead token */
-){
-  int i;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  if( stateno>YY_REDUCE_COUNT ){
-    return yy_default[stateno];
-  }
-#else
-  assert( stateno<=YY_REDUCE_COUNT );
-#endif
-  i = yy_reduce_ofst[stateno];
-  assert( i!=YY_REDUCE_USE_DFLT );
-  assert( iLookAhead!=YYNOCODE );
-  i += iLookAhead;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  if( i<0 || i>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT || yy_lookahead[i]!=iLookAhead ){
-    return yy_default[stateno];
-  }
-#else
-  assert( i>=0 && i<YY_ACTTAB_COUNT );
-  assert( yy_lookahead[i]==iLookAhead );
-#endif
-  return yy_action[i];
-}
-
-/*
-** The following routine is called if the stack overflows.
-*/
-static void yyStackOverflow(yyParser *yypParser){
-   ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-   if( yyTraceFILE ){
-     fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sStack Overflow!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-   }
-#endif
-   while( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-   /* Here code is inserted which will execute if the parser
-   ** stack every overflows */
-/******** Begin %stack_overflow code ******************************************/
-%%
-/******** End %stack_overflow code ********************************************/
-   ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument var */
-}
-
-/*
-** Print tracing information for a SHIFT action
-*/
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-static void yyTraceShift(yyParser *yypParser, int yyNewState){
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    if( yyNewState<YYNSTATE ){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sShift '%s', go to state %d\n",
-         yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yypParser->yytos->major],
-         yyNewState);
-    }else{
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sShift '%s'\n",
-         yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yypParser->yytos->major]);
-    }
-  }
-}
-#else
-# define yyTraceShift(X,Y)
-#endif
-
-/*
-** Perform a shift action.
-*/
-static void yy_shift(
-  yyParser *yypParser,          /* The parser to be shifted */
-  int yyNewState,               /* The new state to shift in */
-  int yyMajor,                  /* The major token to shift in */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyMinor        /* The minor token to shift in */
-){
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;
-  yypParser->yytos++;
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  if( (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack)>yypParser->yyhwm ){
-    yypParser->yyhwm++;
-    assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack) );
-  }
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
-  if( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystackEnd ){
-    yypParser->yytos--;
-    yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-    return;
-  }
-#else
-  if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yystksz] ){
-    if( yyGrowStack(yypParser) ){
-      yypParser->yytos--;
-      yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-      return;
-    }
-  }
-#endif
-  if( yyNewState > YY_MAX_SHIFT ){
-    yyNewState += YY_MIN_REDUCE - YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE;
-  }
-  yytos = yypParser->yytos;
-  yytos->stateno = (YYACTIONTYPE)yyNewState;
-  yytos->major = (YYCODETYPE)yyMajor;
-  yytos->minor.yy0 = yyMinor;
-  yyTraceShift(yypParser, yyNewState);
-}
-
-/* The following table contains information about every rule that
-** is used during the reduce.
-*/
-static const struct {
-  YYCODETYPE lhs;       /* Symbol on the left-hand side of the rule */
-  signed char nrhs;     /* Negative of the number of RHS symbols in the rule */
-} yyRuleInfo[] = {
-%%
-};
-
-static void yy_accept(yyParser*);  /* Forward Declaration */
-
-/*
-** Perform a reduce action and the shift that must immediately
-** follow the reduce.
-**
-** The yyLookahead and yyLookaheadToken parameters provide reduce actions
-** access to the lookahead token (if any).  The yyLookahead will be YYNOCODE
-** if the lookahead token has already been consumed.  As this procedure is
-** only called from one place, optimizing compilers will in-line it, which
-** means that the extra parameters have no performance impact.
-*/
-static void yy_reduce(
-  yyParser *yypParser,         /* The parser */
-  unsigned int yyruleno,       /* Number of the rule by which to reduce */
-  int yyLookahead,             /* Lookahead token, or YYNOCODE if none */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyLookaheadToken  /* Value of the lookahead token */
-){
-  int yygoto;                     /* The next state */
-  int yyact;                      /* The next action */
-  yyStackEntry *yymsp;            /* The top of the parser's stack */
-  int yysize;                     /* Amount to pop the stack */
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-  yymsp = yypParser->yytos;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE && yyruleno<(int)(sizeof(yyRuleName)/sizeof(yyRuleName[0])) ){
-    yysize = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs;
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sReduce [%s], go to state %d.\n", yyTracePrompt,
-      yyRuleName[yyruleno], yymsp[yysize].stateno);
-  }
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-  /* Check that the stack is large enough to grow by a single entry
-  ** if the RHS of the rule is empty.  This ensures that there is room
-  ** enough on the stack to push the LHS value */
-  if( yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs==0 ){
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-    if( (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack)>yypParser->yyhwm ){
-      yypParser->yyhwm++;
-      assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack));
-    }
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
-    if( yypParser->yytos>=yypParser->yystackEnd ){
-      yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-      return;
-    }
-#else
-    if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yystksz-1] ){
-      if( yyGrowStack(yypParser) ){
-        yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-        return;
-      }
-      yymsp = yypParser->yytos;
-    }
-#endif
-  }
-
-  switch( yyruleno ){
-  /* Beginning here are the reduction cases.  A typical example
-  ** follows:
-  **   case 0:
-  **  #line <lineno> <grammarfile>
-  **     { ... }           // User supplied code
-  **  #line <lineno> <thisfile>
-  **     break;
-  */
-/********** Begin reduce actions **********************************************/
-%%
-/********** End reduce actions ************************************************/
-  };
-  assert( yyruleno<sizeof(yyRuleInfo)/sizeof(yyRuleInfo[0]) );
-  yygoto = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].lhs;
-  yysize = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs;
-  yyact = yy_find_reduce_action(yymsp[yysize].stateno,(YYCODETYPE)yygoto);
-
-  /* There are no SHIFTREDUCE actions on nonterminals because the table
-  ** generator has simplified them to pure REDUCE actions. */
-  assert( !(yyact>YY_MAX_SHIFT && yyact<=YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE) );
-
-  /* It is not possible for a REDUCE to be followed by an error */
-  assert( yyact!=YY_ERROR_ACTION );
-
-  if( yyact==YY_ACCEPT_ACTION ){
-    yypParser->yytos += yysize;
-    yy_accept(yypParser);
-  }else{
-    yymsp += yysize+1;
-    yypParser->yytos = yymsp;
-    yymsp->stateno = (YYACTIONTYPE)yyact;
-    yymsp->major = (YYCODETYPE)yygoto;
-    yyTraceShift(yypParser, yyact);
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** The following code executes when the parse fails
-*/
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-static void yy_parse_failed(
-  yyParser *yypParser           /* The parser */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sFail!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-  }
-#endif
-  while( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-  /* Here code is inserted which will be executed whenever the
-  ** parser fails */
-/************ Begin %parse_failure code ***************************************/
-%%
-/************ End %parse_failure code *****************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-#endif /* YYNOERRORRECOVERY */
-
-/*
-** The following code executes when a syntax error first occurs.
-*/
-static void yy_syntax_error(
-  yyParser *yypParser,           /* The parser */
-  int yymajor,                   /* The major type of the error token */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyminor         /* The minor type of the error token */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#define TOKEN yyminor
-/************ Begin %syntax_error code ****************************************/
-%%
-/************ End %syntax_error code ******************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-
-/*
-** The following is executed when the parser accepts
-*/
-static void yy_accept(
-  yyParser *yypParser           /* The parser */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sAccept!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-  }
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-  assert( yypParser->yytos==yypParser->yystack );
-  /* Here code is inserted which will be executed whenever the
-  ** parser accepts */
-/*********** Begin %parse_accept code *****************************************/
-%%
-/*********** End %parse_accept code *******************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-
-/* The main parser program.
-** The first argument is a pointer to a structure obtained from
-** "ParseAlloc" which describes the current state of the parser.
-** The second argument is the major token number.  The third is
-** the minor token.  The fourth optional argument is whatever the
-** user wants (and specified in the grammar) and is available for
-** use by the action routines.
-**
-** Inputs:
-** <ul>
-** <li> A pointer to the parser (an opaque structure.)
-** <li> The major token number.
-** <li> The minor token number.
-** <li> An option argument of a grammar-specified type.
-** </ul>
-**
-** Outputs:
-** None.
-*/
-void Parse(
-  void *yyp,                   /* The parser */
-  int yymajor,                 /* The major token code number */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyminor       /* The value for the token */
-  ParseARG_PDECL               /* Optional %extra_argument parameter */
-){
-  YYMINORTYPE yyminorunion;
-  unsigned int yyact;   /* The parser action. */
-#if !defined(YYERRORSYMBOL) && !defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-  int yyendofinput;     /* True if we are at the end of input */
-#endif
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  int yyerrorhit = 0;   /* True if yymajor has invoked an error */
-#endif
-  yyParser *yypParser;  /* The parser */
-
-  yypParser = (yyParser*)yyp;
-  assert( yypParser->yytos!=0 );
-#if !defined(YYERRORSYMBOL) && !defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-  yyendofinput = (yymajor==0);
-#endif
-  ParseARG_STORE;
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sInput '%s'\n",yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yymajor]);
-  }
-#endif
-
-  do{
-    yyact = yy_find_shift_action(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor);
-    if( yyact <= YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE ){
-      yy_shift(yypParser,yyact,yymajor,yyminor);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt--;
-#endif
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-    }else if( yyact <= YY_MAX_REDUCE ){
-      yy_reduce(yypParser,yyact-YY_MIN_REDUCE,yymajor,yyminor);
-    }else{
-      assert( yyact == YY_ERROR_ACTION );
-      yyminorunion.yy0 = yyminor;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-      int yymx;
-#endif
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-      if( yyTraceFILE ){
-        fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sSyntax Error!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-      }
-#endif
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-      /* A syntax error has occurred.
-      ** The response to an error depends upon whether or not the
-      ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".  
-      **
-      ** This is what we do if the grammar does define ERROR:
-      **
-      **  * Call the %syntax_error function.
-      **
-      **  * Begin popping the stack until we enter a state where
-      **    it is legal to shift the error symbol, then shift
-      **    the error symbol.
-      **
-      **  * Set the error count to three.
-      **
-      **  * Begin accepting and shifting new tokens.  No new error
-      **    processing will occur until three tokens have been
-      **    shifted successfully.
-      **
-      */
-      if( yypParser->yyerrcnt<0 ){
-        yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor,yyminor);
-      }
-      yymx = yypParser->yytos->major;
-      if( yymx==YYERRORSYMBOL || yyerrorhit ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-        if( yyTraceFILE ){
-          fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sDiscard input token %s\n",
-             yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yymajor]);
-        }
-#endif
-        yy_destructor(yypParser, (YYCODETYPE)yymajor, &yyminorunion);
-        yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-      }else{
-        while( yypParser->yytos >= yypParser->yystack
-            && yymx != YYERRORSYMBOL
-            && (yyact = yy_find_reduce_action(
-                        yypParser->yytos->stateno,
-                        YYERRORSYMBOL)) >= YY_MIN_REDUCE
-        ){
-          yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-        }
-        if( yypParser->yytos < yypParser->yystack || yymajor==0 ){
-          yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-          yy_parse_failed(yypParser);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-          yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-          yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-        }else if( yymx!=YYERRORSYMBOL ){
-          yy_shift(yypParser,yyact,YYERRORSYMBOL,yyminor);
-        }
-      }
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt = 3;
-      yyerrorhit = 1;
-#elif defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-      /* If the YYNOERRORRECOVERY macro is defined, then do not attempt to
-      ** do any kind of error recovery.  Instead, simply invoke the syntax
-      ** error routine and continue going as if nothing had happened.
-      **
-      ** Applications can set this macro (for example inside %include) if
-      ** they intend to abandon the parse upon the first syntax error seen.
-      */
-      yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
-      yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-      
-#else  /* YYERRORSYMBOL is not defined */
-      /* This is what we do if the grammar does not define ERROR:
-      **
-      **  * Report an error message, and throw away the input token.
-      **
-      **  * If the input token is $, then fail the parse.
-      **
-      ** As before, subsequent error messages are suppressed until
-      ** three input tokens have been successfully shifted.
-      */
-      if( yypParser->yyerrcnt<=0 ){
-        yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
-      }
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt = 3;
-      yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-      if( yyendofinput ){
-        yy_parse_failed(yypParser);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-        yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-      }
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-#endif
-    }
-  }while( yymajor!=YYNOCODE && yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack );
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    yyStackEntry *i;
-    char cDiv = '[';
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sReturn. Stack=",yyTracePrompt);
-    for(i=&yypParser->yystack[1]; i<=yypParser->yytos; i++){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%c%s", cDiv, yyTokenName[i->major]);
-      cDiv = ' ';
-    }
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"]\n");
-  }
-#endif
-  return;
-}

tools/bin/windows/lempar.c

@@ -1,981 +0,0 @@
-/*
-** 2000-05-29
-**
-** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.  In place of
-** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
-**
-**    May you do good and not evil.
-**    May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
-**    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
-**
-*************************************************************************
-** Driver template for the LEMON parser generator.
-**
-** The "lemon" program processes an LALR(1) input grammar file, then uses
-** this template to construct a parser.  The "lemon" program inserts text
-** at each "%%" line.  Also, any "P-a-r-s-e" identifier prefix (without the
-** interstitial "-" characters) contained in this template is changed into
-** the value of the %name directive from the grammar.  Otherwise, the content
-** of this template is copied straight through into the generate parser
-** source file.
-**
-** The following is the concatenation of all %include directives from the
-** input grammar file:
-*/
-#include <stdio.h>
-/************ Begin %include sections from the grammar ************************/
-%%
-/**************** End of %include directives **********************************/
-/* These constants specify the various numeric values for terminal symbols
-** in a format understandable to "makeheaders".  This section is blank unless
-** "lemon" is run with the "-m" command-line option.
-***************** Begin makeheaders token definitions *************************/
-%%
-/**************** End makeheaders token definitions ***************************/
-
-/* The next sections is a series of control #defines.
-** various aspects of the generated parser.
-**    YYCODETYPE         is the data type used to store the integer codes
-**                       that represent terminal and non-terminal symbols.
-**                       "unsigned char" is used if there are fewer than
-**                       256 symbols.  Larger types otherwise.
-**    YYNOCODE           is a number of type YYCODETYPE that is not used for
-**                       any terminal or nonterminal symbol.
-**    YYFALLBACK         If defined, this indicates that one or more tokens
-**                       (also known as: "terminal symbols") have fall-back
-**                       values which should be used if the original symbol
-**                       would not parse.  This permits keywords to sometimes
-**                       be used as identifiers, for example.
-**    YYACTIONTYPE       is the data type used for "action codes" - numbers
-**                       that indicate what to do in response to the next
-**                       token.
-**    ParseTOKENTYPE     is the data type used for minor type for terminal
-**                       symbols.  Background: A "minor type" is a semantic
-**                       value associated with a terminal or non-terminal
-**                       symbols.  For example, for an "ID" terminal symbol,
-**                       the minor type might be the name of the identifier.
-**                       Each non-terminal can have a different minor type.
-**                       Terminal symbols all have the same minor type, though.
-**                       This macros defines the minor type for terminal 
-**                       symbols.
-**    YYMINORTYPE        is the data type used for all minor types.
-**                       This is typically a union of many types, one of
-**                       which is ParseTOKENTYPE.  The entry in the union
-**                       for terminal symbols is called "yy0".
-**    YYSTACKDEPTH       is the maximum depth of the parser's stack.  If
-**                       zero the stack is dynamically sized using realloc()
-**    ParseARG_SDECL     A static variable declaration for the %extra_argument
-**    ParseARG_PDECL     A parameter declaration for the %extra_argument
-**    ParseARG_STORE     Code to store %extra_argument into yypParser
-**    ParseARG_FETCH     Code to extract %extra_argument from yypParser
-**    YYERRORSYMBOL      is the code number of the error symbol.  If not
-**                       defined, then do no error processing.
-**    YYNSTATE           the combined number of states.
-**    YYNRULE            the number of rules in the grammar
-**    YY_MAX_SHIFT       Maximum value for shift actions
-**    YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE Minimum value for shift-reduce actions
-**    YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE Maximum value for shift-reduce actions
-**    YY_MIN_REDUCE      Minimum value for reduce actions
-**    YY_MAX_REDUCE      Maximum value for reduce actions
-**    YY_ERROR_ACTION    The yy_action[] code for syntax error
-**    YY_ACCEPT_ACTION   The yy_action[] code for accept
-**    YY_NO_ACTION       The yy_action[] code for no-op
-*/
-#ifndef INTERFACE
-# define INTERFACE 1
-#endif
-/************* Begin control #defines *****************************************/
-%%
-/************* End control #defines *******************************************/
-
-/* Define the yytestcase() macro to be a no-op if is not already defined
-** otherwise.
-**
-** Applications can choose to define yytestcase() in the %include section
-** to a macro that can assist in verifying code coverage.  For production
-** code the yytestcase() macro should be turned off.  But it is useful
-** for testing.
-*/
-#ifndef yytestcase
-# define yytestcase(X)
-#endif
-
-
-/* Next are the tables used to determine what action to take based on the
-** current state and lookahead token.  These tables are used to implement
-** functions that take a state number and lookahead value and return an
-** action integer.  
-**
-** Suppose the action integer is N.  Then the action is determined as
-** follows
-**
-**   0 <= N <= YY_MAX_SHIFT             Shift N.  That is, push the lookahead
-**                                      token onto the stack and goto state N.
-**
-**   N between YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE       Shift to an arbitrary state then
-**     and YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE           reduce by rule N-YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE.
-**
-**   N between YY_MIN_REDUCE            Reduce by rule N-YY_MIN_REDUCE
-**     and YY_MAX_REDUCE
-**
-**   N == YY_ERROR_ACTION               A syntax error has occurred.
-**
-**   N == YY_ACCEPT_ACTION              The parser accepts its input.
-**
-**   N == YY_NO_ACTION                  No such action.  Denotes unused
-**                                      slots in the yy_action[] table.
-**
-** The action table is constructed as a single large table named yy_action[].
-** Given state S and lookahead X, the action is computed as either:
-**
-**    (A)   N = yy_action[ yy_shift_ofst[S] + X ]
-**    (B)   N = yy_default[S]
-**
-** The (A) formula is preferred.  The B formula is used instead if:
-**    (1)  The yy_shift_ofst[S]+X value is out of range, or
-**    (2)  yy_lookahead[yy_shift_ofst[S]+X] is not equal to X, or
-**    (3)  yy_shift_ofst[S] equal YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT.
-** (Implementation note: YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT is chosen so that
-** YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT+X will be out of range for all possible lookaheads X.
-** Hence only tests (1) and (2) need to be evaluated.)
-**
-** The formulas above are for computing the action when the lookahead is
-** a terminal symbol.  If the lookahead is a non-terminal (as occurs after
-** a reduce action) then the yy_reduce_ofst[] array is used in place of
-** the yy_shift_ofst[] array and YY_REDUCE_USE_DFLT is used in place of
-** YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT.
-**
-** The following are the tables generated in this section:
-**
-**  yy_action[]        A single table containing all actions.
-**  yy_lookahead[]     A table containing the lookahead for each entry in
-**                     yy_action.  Used to detect hash collisions.
-**  yy_shift_ofst[]    For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-**                     shifting terminals.
-**  yy_reduce_ofst[]   For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-**                     shifting non-terminals after a reduce.
-**  yy_default[]       Default action for each state.
-**
-*********** Begin parsing tables **********************************************/
-%%
-/********** End of lemon-generated parsing tables *****************************/
-
-/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.  
-** If a construct like the following:
-** 
-**      %fallback ID X Y Z.
-**
-** appears in the grammar, then ID becomes a fallback token for X, Y,
-** and Z.  Whenever one of the tokens X, Y, or Z is input to the parser
-** but it does not parse, the type of the token is changed to ID and
-** the parse is retried before an error is thrown.
-**
-** This feature can be used, for example, to cause some keywords in a language
-** to revert to identifiers if they keyword does not apply in the context where
-** it appears.
-*/
-#ifdef YYFALLBACK
-static const YYCODETYPE yyFallback[] = {
-%%
-};
-#endif /* YYFALLBACK */
-
-/* The following structure represents a single element of the
-** parser's stack.  Information stored includes:
-**
-**   +  The state number for the parser at this level of the stack.
-**
-**   +  The value of the token stored at this level of the stack.
-**      (In other words, the "major" token.)
-**
-**   +  The semantic value stored at this level of the stack.  This is
-**      the information used by the action routines in the grammar.
-**      It is sometimes called the "minor" token.
-**
-** After the "shift" half of a SHIFTREDUCE action, the stateno field
-** actually contains the reduce action for the second half of the
-** SHIFTREDUCE.
-*/
-struct yyStackEntry {
-  YYACTIONTYPE stateno;  /* The state-number, or reduce action in SHIFTREDUCE */
-  YYCODETYPE major;      /* The major token value.  This is the code
-                         ** number for the token at this stack level */
-  YYMINORTYPE minor;     /* The user-supplied minor token value.  This
-                         ** is the value of the token  */
-};
-typedef struct yyStackEntry yyStackEntry;
-
-/* The state of the parser is completely contained in an instance of
-** the following structure */
-struct yyParser {
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;          /* Pointer to top element of the stack */
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  int yyhwm;                    /* High-water mark of the stack */
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  int yyerrcnt;                 /* Shifts left before out of the error */
-#endif
-  ParseARG_SDECL                /* A place to hold %extra_argument */
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  int yystksz;                  /* Current side of the stack */
-  yyStackEntry *yystack;        /* The parser's stack */
-  yyStackEntry yystk0;          /* First stack entry */
-#else
-  yyStackEntry yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH];  /* The parser's stack */
-  yyStackEntry *yystackEnd;            /* Last entry in the stack */
-#endif
-};
-typedef struct yyParser yyParser;
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-#include <stdio.h>
-static FILE *yyTraceFILE = 0;
-static char *yyTracePrompt = 0;
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* 
-** Turn parser tracing on by giving a stream to which to write the trace
-** and a prompt to preface each trace message.  Tracing is turned off
-** by making either argument NULL 
-**
-** Inputs:
-** <ul>
-** <li> A FILE* to which trace output should be written.
-**      If NULL, then tracing is turned off.
-** <li> A prefix string written at the beginning of every
-**      line of trace output.  If NULL, then tracing is
-**      turned off.
-** </ul>
-**
-** Outputs:
-** None.
-*/
-void ParseTrace(FILE *TraceFILE, char *zTracePrompt){
-  yyTraceFILE = TraceFILE;
-  yyTracePrompt = zTracePrompt;
-  if( yyTraceFILE==0 ) yyTracePrompt = 0;
-  else if( yyTracePrompt==0 ) yyTraceFILE = 0;
-}
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* For tracing shifts, the names of all terminals and nonterminals
-** are required.  The following table supplies these names */
-static const char *const yyTokenName[] = { 
-%%
-};
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* For tracing reduce actions, the names of all rules are required.
-*/
-static const char *const yyRuleName[] = {
-%%
-};
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-/*
-** Try to increase the size of the parser stack.  Return the number
-** of errors.  Return 0 on success.
-*/
-static int yyGrowStack(yyParser *p){
-  int newSize;
-  int idx;
-  yyStackEntry *pNew;
-
-  newSize = p->yystksz*2 + 100;
-  idx = p->yytos ? (int)(p->yytos - p->yystack) : 0;
-  if( p->yystack==&p->yystk0 ){
-    pNew = malloc(newSize*sizeof(pNew[0]));
-    if( pNew ) pNew[0] = p->yystk0;
-  }else{
-    pNew = realloc(p->yystack, newSize*sizeof(pNew[0]));
-  }
-  if( pNew ){
-    p->yystack = pNew;
-    p->yytos = &p->yystack[idx];
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-    if( yyTraceFILE ){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sStack grows from %d to %d entries.\n",
-              yyTracePrompt, p->yystksz, newSize);
-    }
-#endif
-    p->yystksz = newSize;
-  }
-  return pNew==0; 
-}
-#endif
-
-/* Datatype of the argument to the memory allocated passed as the
-** second argument to ParseAlloc() below.  This can be changed by
-** putting an appropriate #define in the %include section of the input
-** grammar.
-*/
-#ifndef YYMALLOCARGTYPE
-# define YYMALLOCARGTYPE size_t
-#endif
-
-/* Initialize a new parser that has already been allocated.
-*/
-void ParseInit(void *yypParser){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)yypParser;
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  pParser->yyhwm = 0;
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  pParser->yytos = NULL;
-  pParser->yystack = NULL;
-  pParser->yystksz = 0;
-  if( yyGrowStack(pParser) ){
-    pParser->yystack = &pParser->yystk0;
-    pParser->yystksz = 1;
-  }
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  pParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-  pParser->yytos = pParser->yystack;
-  pParser->yystack[0].stateno = 0;
-  pParser->yystack[0].major = 0;
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
-  pParser->yystackEnd = &pParser->yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH-1];
-#endif
-}
-
-#ifndef Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
-** This function allocates a new parser.
-** The only argument is a pointer to a function which works like
-** malloc.
-**
-** Inputs:
-** A pointer to the function used to allocate memory.
-**
-** Outputs:
-** A pointer to a parser.  This pointer is used in subsequent calls
-** to Parse and ParseFree.
-*/
-void *ParseAlloc(void *(*mallocProc)(YYMALLOCARGTYPE)){
-  yyParser *pParser;
-  pParser = (yyParser*)(*mallocProc)( (YYMALLOCARGTYPE)sizeof(yyParser) );
-  if( pParser ) ParseInit(pParser);
-  return pParser;
-}
-#endif /* Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK */
-
-
-/* The following function deletes the "minor type" or semantic value
-** associated with a symbol.  The symbol can be either a terminal
-** or nonterminal. "yymajor" is the symbol code, and "yypminor" is
-** a pointer to the value to be deleted.  The code used to do the 
-** deletions is derived from the %destructor and/or %token_destructor
-** directives of the input grammar.
-*/
-static void yy_destructor(
-  yyParser *yypParser,    /* The parser */
-  YYCODETYPE yymajor,     /* Type code for object to destroy */
-  YYMINORTYPE *yypminor   /* The object to be destroyed */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-  switch( yymajor ){
-    /* Here is inserted the actions which take place when a
-    ** terminal or non-terminal is destroyed.  This can happen
-    ** when the symbol is popped from the stack during a
-    ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is 
-    ** being destroyed before it is finished parsing.
-    **
-    ** Note: during a reduce, the only symbols destroyed are those
-    ** which appear on the RHS of the rule, but which are *not* used
-    ** inside the C code.
-    */
-/********* Begin destructor definitions ***************************************/
-%%
-/********* End destructor definitions *****************************************/
-    default:  break;   /* If no destructor action specified: do nothing */
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** Pop the parser's stack once.
-**
-** If there is a destructor routine associated with the token which
-** is popped from the stack, then call it.
-*/
-static void yy_pop_parser_stack(yyParser *pParser){
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;
-  assert( pParser->yytos!=0 );
-  assert( pParser->yytos > pParser->yystack );
-  yytos = pParser->yytos--;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sPopping %s\n",
-      yyTracePrompt,
-      yyTokenName[yytos->major]);
-  }
-#endif
-  yy_destructor(pParser, yytos->major, &yytos->minor);
-}
-
-/*
-** Clear all secondary memory allocations from the parser
-*/
-void ParseFinalize(void *p){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)p;
-  while( pParser->yytos>pParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(pParser);
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  if( pParser->yystack!=&pParser->yystk0 ) free(pParser->yystack);
-#endif
-}
-
-#ifndef Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
-** Deallocate and destroy a parser.  Destructors are called for
-** all stack elements before shutting the parser down.
-**
-** If the YYPARSEFREENEVERNULL macro exists (for example because it
-** is defined in a %include section of the input grammar) then it is
-** assumed that the input pointer is never NULL.
-*/
-void ParseFree(
-  void *p,                    /* The parser to be deleted */
-  void (*freeProc)(void*)     /* Function used to reclaim memory */
-){
-#ifndef YYPARSEFREENEVERNULL
-  if( p==0 ) return;
-#endif
-  ParseFinalize(p);
-  (*freeProc)(p);
-}
-#endif /* Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK */
-
-/*
-** Return the peak depth of the stack for a parser.
-*/
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-int ParseStackPeak(void *p){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)p;
-  return pParser->yyhwm;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*
-** Find the appropriate action for a parser given the terminal
-** look-ahead token iLookAhead.
-*/
-static unsigned int yy_find_shift_action(
-  yyParser *pParser,        /* The parser */
-  YYCODETYPE iLookAhead     /* The look-ahead token */
-){
-  int i;
-  int stateno = pParser->yytos->stateno;
- 
-  if( stateno>=YY_MIN_REDUCE ) return stateno;
-  assert( stateno <= YY_SHIFT_COUNT );
-  do{
-    i = yy_shift_ofst[stateno];
-    assert( iLookAhead!=YYNOCODE );
-    i += iLookAhead;
-    if( i<0 || i>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT || yy_lookahead[i]!=iLookAhead ){
-#ifdef YYFALLBACK
-      YYCODETYPE iFallback;            /* Fallback token */
-      if( iLookAhead<sizeof(yyFallback)/sizeof(yyFallback[0])
-             && (iFallback = yyFallback[iLookAhead])!=0 ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-        if( yyTraceFILE ){
-          fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sFALLBACK %s => %s\n",
-             yyTracePrompt, yyTokenName[iLookAhead], yyTokenName[iFallback]);
-        }
-#endif
-        assert( yyFallback[iFallback]==0 ); /* Fallback loop must terminate */
-        iLookAhead = iFallback;
-        continue;
-      }
-#endif
-#ifdef YYWILDCARD
-      {
-        int j = i - iLookAhead + YYWILDCARD;
-        if( 
-#if YY_SHIFT_MIN+YYWILDCARD<0
-          j>=0 &&
-#endif
-#if YY_SHIFT_MAX+YYWILDCARD>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT
-          j<YY_ACTTAB_COUNT &&
-#endif
-          yy_lookahead[j]==YYWILDCARD && iLookAhead>0
-        ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-          if( yyTraceFILE ){
-            fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sWILDCARD %s => %s\n",
-               yyTracePrompt, yyTokenName[iLookAhead],
-               yyTokenName[YYWILDCARD]);
-          }
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-          return yy_action[j];
-        }
-      }
-#endif /* YYWILDCARD */
-      return yy_default[stateno];
-    }else{
-      return yy_action[i];
-    }
-  }while(1);
-}
-
-/*
-** Find the appropriate action for a parser given the non-terminal
-** look-ahead token iLookAhead.
-*/
-static int yy_find_reduce_action(
-  int stateno,              /* Current state number */
-  YYCODETYPE iLookAhead     /* The look-ahead token */
-){
-  int i;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  if( stateno>YY_REDUCE_COUNT ){
-    return yy_default[stateno];
-  }
-#else
-  assert( stateno<=YY_REDUCE_COUNT );
-#endif
-  i = yy_reduce_ofst[stateno];
-  assert( i!=YY_REDUCE_USE_DFLT );
-  assert( iLookAhead!=YYNOCODE );
-  i += iLookAhead;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  if( i<0 || i>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT || yy_lookahead[i]!=iLookAhead ){
-    return yy_default[stateno];
-  }
-#else
-  assert( i>=0 && i<YY_ACTTAB_COUNT );
-  assert( yy_lookahead[i]==iLookAhead );
-#endif
-  return yy_action[i];
-}
-
-/*
-** The following routine is called if the stack overflows.
-*/
-static void yyStackOverflow(yyParser *yypParser){
-   ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-   if( yyTraceFILE ){
-     fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sStack Overflow!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-   }
-#endif
-   while( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-   /* Here code is inserted which will execute if the parser
-   ** stack every overflows */
-/******** Begin %stack_overflow code ******************************************/
-%%
-/******** End %stack_overflow code ********************************************/
-   ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument var */
-}
-
-/*
-** Print tracing information for a SHIFT action
-*/
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-static void yyTraceShift(yyParser *yypParser, int yyNewState){
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    if( yyNewState<YYNSTATE ){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sShift '%s', go to state %d\n",
-         yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yypParser->yytos->major],
-         yyNewState);
-    }else{
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sShift '%s'\n",
-         yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yypParser->yytos->major]);
-    }
-  }
-}
-#else
-# define yyTraceShift(X,Y)
-#endif
-
-/*
-** Perform a shift action.
-*/
-static void yy_shift(
-  yyParser *yypParser,          /* The parser to be shifted */
-  int yyNewState,               /* The new state to shift in */
-  int yyMajor,                  /* The major token to shift in */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyMinor        /* The minor token to shift in */
-){
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;
-  yypParser->yytos++;
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  if( (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack)>yypParser->yyhwm ){
-    yypParser->yyhwm++;
-    assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack) );
-  }
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
-  if( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystackEnd ){
-    yypParser->yytos--;
-    yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-    return;
-  }
-#else
-  if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yystksz] ){
-    if( yyGrowStack(yypParser) ){
-      yypParser->yytos--;
-      yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-      return;
-    }
-  }
-#endif
-  if( yyNewState > YY_MAX_SHIFT ){
-    yyNewState += YY_MIN_REDUCE - YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE;
-  }
-  yytos = yypParser->yytos;
-  yytos->stateno = (YYACTIONTYPE)yyNewState;
-  yytos->major = (YYCODETYPE)yyMajor;
-  yytos->minor.yy0 = yyMinor;
-  yyTraceShift(yypParser, yyNewState);
-}
-
-/* The following table contains information about every rule that
-** is used during the reduce.
-*/
-static const struct {
-  YYCODETYPE lhs;       /* Symbol on the left-hand side of the rule */
-  signed char nrhs;     /* Negative of the number of RHS symbols in the rule */
-} yyRuleInfo[] = {
-%%
-};
-
-static void yy_accept(yyParser*);  /* Forward Declaration */
-
-/*
-** Perform a reduce action and the shift that must immediately
-** follow the reduce.
-**
-** The yyLookahead and yyLookaheadToken parameters provide reduce actions
-** access to the lookahead token (if any).  The yyLookahead will be YYNOCODE
-** if the lookahead token has already been consumed.  As this procedure is
-** only called from one place, optimizing compilers will in-line it, which
-** means that the extra parameters have no performance impact.
-*/
-static void yy_reduce(
-  yyParser *yypParser,         /* The parser */
-  unsigned int yyruleno,       /* Number of the rule by which to reduce */
-  int yyLookahead,             /* Lookahead token, or YYNOCODE if none */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyLookaheadToken  /* Value of the lookahead token */
-){
-  int yygoto;                     /* The next state */
-  int yyact;                      /* The next action */
-  yyStackEntry *yymsp;            /* The top of the parser's stack */
-  int yysize;                     /* Amount to pop the stack */
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-  yymsp = yypParser->yytos;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE && yyruleno<(int)(sizeof(yyRuleName)/sizeof(yyRuleName[0])) ){
-    yysize = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs;
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sReduce [%s], go to state %d.\n", yyTracePrompt,
-      yyRuleName[yyruleno], yymsp[yysize].stateno);
-  }
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-  /* Check that the stack is large enough to grow by a single entry
-  ** if the RHS of the rule is empty.  This ensures that there is room
-  ** enough on the stack to push the LHS value */
-  if( yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs==0 ){
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-    if( (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack)>yypParser->yyhwm ){
-      yypParser->yyhwm++;
-      assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack));
-    }
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
-    if( yypParser->yytos>=yypParser->yystackEnd ){
-      yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-      return;
-    }
-#else
-    if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yystksz-1] ){
-      if( yyGrowStack(yypParser) ){
-        yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-        return;
-      }
-      yymsp = yypParser->yytos;
-    }
-#endif
-  }
-
-  switch( yyruleno ){
-  /* Beginning here are the reduction cases.  A typical example
-  ** follows:
-  **   case 0:
-  **  #line <lineno> <grammarfile>
-  **     { ... }           // User supplied code
-  **  #line <lineno> <thisfile>
-  **     break;
-  */
-/********** Begin reduce actions **********************************************/
-%%
-/********** End reduce actions ************************************************/
-  };
-  assert( yyruleno<sizeof(yyRuleInfo)/sizeof(yyRuleInfo[0]) );
-  yygoto = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].lhs;
-  yysize = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs;
-  yyact = yy_find_reduce_action(yymsp[yysize].stateno,(YYCODETYPE)yygoto);
-
-  /* There are no SHIFTREDUCE actions on nonterminals because the table
-  ** generator has simplified them to pure REDUCE actions. */
-  assert( !(yyact>YY_MAX_SHIFT && yyact<=YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE) );
-
-  /* It is not possible for a REDUCE to be followed by an error */
-  assert( yyact!=YY_ERROR_ACTION );
-
-  if( yyact==YY_ACCEPT_ACTION ){
-    yypParser->yytos += yysize;
-    yy_accept(yypParser);
-  }else{
-    yymsp += yysize+1;
-    yypParser->yytos = yymsp;
-    yymsp->stateno = (YYACTIONTYPE)yyact;
-    yymsp->major = (YYCODETYPE)yygoto;
-    yyTraceShift(yypParser, yyact);
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** The following code executes when the parse fails
-*/
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-static void yy_parse_failed(
-  yyParser *yypParser           /* The parser */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sFail!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-  }
-#endif
-  while( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-  /* Here code is inserted which will be executed whenever the
-  ** parser fails */
-/************ Begin %parse_failure code ***************************************/
-%%
-/************ End %parse_failure code *****************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-#endif /* YYNOERRORRECOVERY */
-
-/*
-** The following code executes when a syntax error first occurs.
-*/
-static void yy_syntax_error(
-  yyParser *yypParser,           /* The parser */
-  int yymajor,                   /* The major type of the error token */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyminor         /* The minor type of the error token */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#define TOKEN yyminor
-/************ Begin %syntax_error code ****************************************/
-%%
-/************ End %syntax_error code ******************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-
-/*
-** The following is executed when the parser accepts
-*/
-static void yy_accept(
-  yyParser *yypParser           /* The parser */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sAccept!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-  }
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-  assert( yypParser->yytos==yypParser->yystack );
-  /* Here code is inserted which will be executed whenever the
-  ** parser accepts */
-/*********** Begin %parse_accept code *****************************************/
-%%
-/*********** End %parse_accept code *******************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-
-/* The main parser program.
-** The first argument is a pointer to a structure obtained from
-** "ParseAlloc" which describes the current state of the parser.
-** The second argument is the major token number.  The third is
-** the minor token.  The fourth optional argument is whatever the
-** user wants (and specified in the grammar) and is available for
-** use by the action routines.
-**
-** Inputs:
-** <ul>
-** <li> A pointer to the parser (an opaque structure.)
-** <li> The major token number.
-** <li> The minor token number.
-** <li> An option argument of a grammar-specified type.
-** </ul>
-**
-** Outputs:
-** None.
-*/
-void Parse(
-  void *yyp,                   /* The parser */
-  int yymajor,                 /* The major token code number */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyminor       /* The value for the token */
-  ParseARG_PDECL               /* Optional %extra_argument parameter */
-){
-  YYMINORTYPE yyminorunion;
-  unsigned int yyact;   /* The parser action. */
-#if !defined(YYERRORSYMBOL) && !defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-  int yyendofinput;     /* True if we are at the end of input */
-#endif
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  int yyerrorhit = 0;   /* True if yymajor has invoked an error */
-#endif
-  yyParser *yypParser;  /* The parser */
-
-  yypParser = (yyParser*)yyp;
-  assert( yypParser->yytos!=0 );
-#if !defined(YYERRORSYMBOL) && !defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-  yyendofinput = (yymajor==0);
-#endif
-  ParseARG_STORE;
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sInput '%s'\n",yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yymajor]);
-  }
-#endif
-
-  do{
-    yyact = yy_find_shift_action(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor);
-    if( yyact <= YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE ){
-      yy_shift(yypParser,yyact,yymajor,yyminor);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt--;
-#endif
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-    }else if( yyact <= YY_MAX_REDUCE ){
-      yy_reduce(yypParser,yyact-YY_MIN_REDUCE,yymajor,yyminor);
-    }else{
-      assert( yyact == YY_ERROR_ACTION );
-      yyminorunion.yy0 = yyminor;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-      int yymx;
-#endif
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-      if( yyTraceFILE ){
-        fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sSyntax Error!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-      }
-#endif
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-      /* A syntax error has occurred.
-      ** The response to an error depends upon whether or not the
-      ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".  
-      **
-      ** This is what we do if the grammar does define ERROR:
-      **
-      **  * Call the %syntax_error function.
-      **
-      **  * Begin popping the stack until we enter a state where
-      **    it is legal to shift the error symbol, then shift
-      **    the error symbol.
-      **
-      **  * Set the error count to three.
-      **
-      **  * Begin accepting and shifting new tokens.  No new error
-      **    processing will occur until three tokens have been
-      **    shifted successfully.
-      **
-      */
-      if( yypParser->yyerrcnt<0 ){
-        yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor,yyminor);
-      }
-      yymx = yypParser->yytos->major;
-      if( yymx==YYERRORSYMBOL || yyerrorhit ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-        if( yyTraceFILE ){
-          fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sDiscard input token %s\n",
-             yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yymajor]);
-        }
-#endif
-        yy_destructor(yypParser, (YYCODETYPE)yymajor, &yyminorunion);
-        yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-      }else{
-        while( yypParser->yytos >= yypParser->yystack
-            && yymx != YYERRORSYMBOL
-            && (yyact = yy_find_reduce_action(
-                        yypParser->yytos->stateno,
-                        YYERRORSYMBOL)) >= YY_MIN_REDUCE
-        ){
-          yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-        }
-        if( yypParser->yytos < yypParser->yystack || yymajor==0 ){
-          yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-          yy_parse_failed(yypParser);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-          yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-          yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-        }else if( yymx!=YYERRORSYMBOL ){
-          yy_shift(yypParser,yyact,YYERRORSYMBOL,yyminor);
-        }
-      }
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt = 3;
-      yyerrorhit = 1;
-#elif defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-      /* If the YYNOERRORRECOVERY macro is defined, then do not attempt to
-      ** do any kind of error recovery.  Instead, simply invoke the syntax
-      ** error routine and continue going as if nothing had happened.
-      **
-      ** Applications can set this macro (for example inside %include) if
-      ** they intend to abandon the parse upon the first syntax error seen.
-      */
-      yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
-      yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-      
-#else  /* YYERRORSYMBOL is not defined */
-      /* This is what we do if the grammar does not define ERROR:
-      **
-      **  * Report an error message, and throw away the input token.
-      **
-      **  * If the input token is $, then fail the parse.
-      **
-      ** As before, subsequent error messages are suppressed until
-      ** three input tokens have been successfully shifted.
-      */
-      if( yypParser->yyerrcnt<=0 ){
-        yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
-      }
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt = 3;
-      yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-      if( yyendofinput ){
-        yy_parse_failed(yypParser);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-        yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-      }
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-#endif
-    }
-  }while( yymajor!=YYNOCODE && yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack );
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    yyStackEntry *i;
-    char cDiv = '[';
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sReturn. Stack=",yyTracePrompt);
-    for(i=&yypParser->yystack[1]; i<=yypParser->yytos; i++){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%c%s", cDiv, yyTokenName[i->major]);
-      cDiv = ' ';
-    }
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"]\n");
-  }
-#endif
-  return;
-}

tools/lemon/lemon.c

@@ -1,5466 +0,0 @@
-/*
-** This file contains all sources (including headers) to the LEMON
-** LALR(1) parser generator.  The sources have been combined into a
-** single file to make it easy to include LEMON in the source tree
-** and Makefile of another program.
-**
-** The author of this program disclaims copyright.
-*/
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdarg.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <ctype.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <assert.h>
-
-#define ISSPACE(X) isspace((unsigned char)(X))
-#define ISDIGIT(X) isdigit((unsigned char)(X))
-#define ISALNUM(X) isalnum((unsigned char)(X))
-#define ISALPHA(X) isalpha((unsigned char)(X))
-#define ISUPPER(X) isupper((unsigned char)(X))
-#define ISLOWER(X) islower((unsigned char)(X))
-
-
-#ifndef __WIN32__
-#   if defined(_WIN32) || defined(WIN32)
-#       define __WIN32__
-#   endif
-#endif
-
-#ifdef __WIN32__
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-extern "C" {
-#endif
-extern int access(const char *path, int mode);
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-}
-#endif
-#else
-#include <unistd.h>
-#endif
-
-/* #define PRIVATE static */
-#define PRIVATE
-
-#ifdef TEST
-#define MAXRHS 5       /* Set low to exercise exception code */
-#else
-#define MAXRHS 1000
-#endif
-
-static int showPrecedenceConflict = 0;
-static char *msort(char*,char**,int(*)(const char*,const char*));
-
-/*
-** Compilers are getting increasingly pedantic about type conversions
-** as C evolves ever closer to Ada....  To work around the latest problems
-** we have to define the following variant of strlen().
-*/
-#define lemonStrlen(X)   ((int)strlen(X))
-
-/*
-** Compilers are starting to complain about the use of sprintf() and strcpy(),
-** saying they are unsafe.  So we define our own versions of those routines too.
-**
-** There are three routines here:  lemon_sprintf(), lemon_vsprintf(), and
-** lemon_addtext(). The first two are replacements for sprintf() and vsprintf().
-** The third is a helper routine for vsnprintf() that adds texts to the end of a
-** buffer, making sure the buffer is always zero-terminated.
-**
-** The string formatter is a minimal subset of stdlib sprintf() supporting only
-** a few simply conversions:
-**
-**   %d
-**   %s
-**   %.*s
-**
-*/
-static void lemon_addtext(
-  char *zBuf,           /* The buffer to which text is added */
-  int *pnUsed,          /* Slots of the buffer used so far */
-  const char *zIn,      /* Text to add */
-  int nIn,              /* Bytes of text to add.  -1 to use strlen() */
-  int iWidth            /* Field width.  Negative to left justify */
-){
-  if( nIn<0 ) for(nIn=0; zIn[nIn]; nIn++){}
-  while( iWidth>nIn ){ zBuf[(*pnUsed)++] = ' '; iWidth--; }
-  if( nIn==0 ) return;
-  memcpy(&zBuf[*pnUsed], zIn, nIn);
-  *pnUsed += nIn;
-  while( (-iWidth)>nIn ){ zBuf[(*pnUsed)++] = ' '; iWidth++; }
-  zBuf[*pnUsed] = 0;
-}
-static int lemon_vsprintf(char *str, const char *zFormat, va_list ap){
-  int i, j, k, c;
-  int nUsed = 0;
-  const char *z;
-  char zTemp[50];
-  str[0] = 0;
-  for(i=j=0; (c = zFormat[i])!=0; i++){
-    if( c=='%' ){
-      int iWidth = 0;
-      lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, &zFormat[j], i-j, 0);
-      c = zFormat[++i];
-      if( ISDIGIT(c) || (c=='-' && ISDIGIT(zFormat[i+1])) ){
-        if( c=='-' ) i++;
-        while( ISDIGIT(zFormat[i]) ) iWidth = iWidth*10 + zFormat[i++] - '0';
-        if( c=='-' ) iWidth = -iWidth;
-        c = zFormat[i];
-      }
-      if( c=='d' ){
-        int v = va_arg(ap, int);
-        if( v<0 ){
-          lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, "-", 1, iWidth);
-          v = -v;
-        }else if( v==0 ){
-          lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, "0", 1, iWidth);
-        }
-        k = 0;
-        while( v>0 ){
-          k++;
-          zTemp[sizeof(zTemp)-k] = (v%10) + '0';
-          v /= 10;
-        }
-        lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, &zTemp[sizeof(zTemp)-k], k, iWidth);
-      }else if( c=='s' ){
-        z = va_arg(ap, const char*);
-        lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, z, -1, iWidth);
-      }else if( c=='.' && memcmp(&zFormat[i], ".*s", 3)==0 ){
-        i += 2;
-        k = va_arg(ap, int);
-        z = va_arg(ap, const char*);
-        lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, z, k, iWidth);
-      }else if( c=='%' ){
-        lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, "%", 1, 0);
-      }else{
-        fprintf(stderr, "illegal format\n");
-        exit(1);
-      }
-      j = i+1;
-    }
-  }
-  lemon_addtext(str, &nUsed, &zFormat[j], i-j, 0);
-  return nUsed;
-}
-static int lemon_sprintf(char *str, const char *format, ...){
-  va_list ap;
-  int rc;
-  va_start(ap, format);
-  rc = lemon_vsprintf(str, format, ap);
-  va_end(ap);
-  return rc;
-}
-static void lemon_strcpy(char *dest, const char *src){
-  while( (*(dest++) = *(src++))!=0 ){}
-}
-static void lemon_strcat(char *dest, const char *src){
-  while( *dest ) dest++;
-  lemon_strcpy(dest, src);
-}
-
-
-/* a few forward declarations... */
-struct rule;
-struct lemon;
-struct action;
-
-static struct action *Action_new(void);
-static struct action *Action_sort(struct action *);
-
-/********** From the file "build.h" ************************************/
-void FindRulePrecedences(struct lemon*);
-void FindFirstSets(struct lemon*);
-void FindStates(struct lemon*);
-void FindLinks(struct lemon*);
-void FindFollowSets(struct lemon*);
-void FindActions(struct lemon*);
-
-/********* From the file "configlist.h" *********************************/
-void Configlist_init(void);
-struct config *Configlist_add(struct rule *, int);
-struct config *Configlist_addbasis(struct rule *, int);
-void Configlist_closure(struct lemon *);
-void Configlist_sort(void);
-void Configlist_sortbasis(void);
-struct config *Configlist_return(void);
-struct config *Configlist_basis(void);
-void Configlist_eat(struct config *);
-void Configlist_reset(void);
-
-/********* From the file "error.h" ***************************************/
-void ErrorMsg(const char *, int,const char *, ...);
-
-/****** From the file "option.h" ******************************************/
-enum option_type { OPT_FLAG=1,  OPT_INT,  OPT_DBL,  OPT_STR,
-         OPT_FFLAG, OPT_FINT, OPT_FDBL, OPT_FSTR};
-struct s_options {
-  enum option_type type;
-  const char *label;
-  char *arg;
-  const char *message;
-};
-int    OptInit(char**,struct s_options*,FILE*);
-int    OptNArgs(void);
-char  *OptArg(int);
-void   OptErr(int);
-void   OptPrint(void);
-
-/******** From the file "parse.h" *****************************************/
-void Parse(struct lemon *lemp);
-
-/********* From the file "plink.h" ***************************************/
-struct plink *Plink_new(void);
-void Plink_add(struct plink **, struct config *);
-void Plink_copy(struct plink **, struct plink *);
-void Plink_delete(struct plink *);
-
-/********** From the file "report.h" *************************************/
-void Reprint(struct lemon *);
-void ReportOutput(struct lemon *);
-void ReportTable(struct lemon *, int);
-void ReportHeader(struct lemon *);
-void CompressTables(struct lemon *);
-void ResortStates(struct lemon *);
-
-/********** From the file "set.h" ****************************************/
-void  SetSize(int);             /* All sets will be of size N */
-char *SetNew(void);               /* A new set for element 0..N */
-void  SetFree(char*);             /* Deallocate a set */
-int SetAdd(char*,int);            /* Add element to a set */
-int SetUnion(char *,char *);    /* A <- A U B, thru element N */
-#define SetFind(X,Y) (X[Y])       /* True if Y is in set X */
-
-/********** From the file "struct.h" *************************************/
-/*
-** Principal data structures for the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-
-typedef enum {LEMON_FALSE=0, LEMON_TRUE} Boolean;
-
-/* Symbols (terminals and nonterminals) of the grammar are stored
-** in the following: */
-enum symbol_type {
-  TERMINAL,
-  NONTERMINAL,
-  MULTITERMINAL
-};
-enum e_assoc {
-    LEFT,
-    RIGHT,
-    NONE,
-    UNK
-};
-struct symbol {
-  const char *name;        /* Name of the symbol */
-  int index;               /* Index number for this symbol */
-  enum symbol_type type;   /* Symbols are all either TERMINALS or NTs */
-  struct rule *rule;       /* Linked list of rules of this (if an NT) */
-  struct symbol *fallback; /* fallback token in case this token doesn't parse */
-  int prec;                /* Precedence if defined (-1 otherwise) */
-  enum e_assoc assoc;      /* Associativity if precedence is defined */
-  char *firstset;          /* First-set for all rules of this symbol */
-  Boolean lambda;          /* True if NT and can generate an empty string */
-  int useCnt;              /* Number of times used */
-  char *destructor;        /* Code which executes whenever this symbol is
-                           ** popped from the stack during error processing */
-  int destLineno;          /* Line number for start of destructor.  Set to
-                           ** -1 for duplicate destructors. */
-  char *datatype;          /* The data type of information held by this
-                           ** object. Only used if type==NONTERMINAL */
-  int dtnum;               /* The data type number.  In the parser, the value
-                           ** stack is a union.  The .yy%d element of this
-                           ** union is the correct data type for this object */
-  /* The following fields are used by MULTITERMINALs only */
-  int nsubsym;             /* Number of constituent symbols in the MULTI */
-  struct symbol **subsym;  /* Array of constituent symbols */
-};
-
-/* Each production rule in the grammar is stored in the following
-** structure.  */
-struct rule {
-  struct symbol *lhs;      /* Left-hand side of the rule */
-  const char *lhsalias;    /* Alias for the LHS (NULL if none) */
-  int lhsStart;            /* True if left-hand side is the start symbol */
-  int ruleline;            /* Line number for the rule */
-  int nrhs;                /* Number of RHS symbols */
-  struct symbol **rhs;     /* The RHS symbols */
-  const char **rhsalias;   /* An alias for each RHS symbol (NULL if none) */
-  int line;                /* Line number at which code begins */
-  const char *code;        /* The code executed when this rule is reduced */
-  const char *codePrefix;  /* Setup code before code[] above */
-  const char *codeSuffix;  /* Breakdown code after code[] above */
-  int noCode;              /* True if this rule has no associated C code */
-  int codeEmitted;         /* True if the code has been emitted already */
-  struct symbol *precsym;  /* Precedence symbol for this rule */
-  int index;               /* An index number for this rule */
-  int iRule;               /* Rule number as used in the generated tables */
-  Boolean canReduce;       /* True if this rule is ever reduced */
-  Boolean doesReduce;      /* Reduce actions occur after optimization */
-  struct rule *nextlhs;    /* Next rule with the same LHS */
-  struct rule *next;       /* Next rule in the global list */
-};
-
-/* A configuration is a production rule of the grammar together with
-** a mark (dot) showing how much of that rule has been processed so far.
-** Configurations also contain a follow-set which is a list of terminal
-** symbols which are allowed to immediately follow the end of the rule.
-** Every configuration is recorded as an instance of the following: */
-enum cfgstatus {
-  COMPLETE,
-  INCOMPLETE
-};
-struct config {
-  struct rule *rp;         /* The rule upon which the configuration is based */
-  int dot;                 /* The parse point */
-  char *fws;               /* Follow-set for this configuration only */
-  struct plink *fplp;      /* Follow-set forward propagation links */
-  struct plink *bplp;      /* Follow-set backwards propagation links */
-  struct state *stp;       /* Pointer to state which contains this */
-  enum cfgstatus status;   /* used during followset and shift computations */
-  struct config *next;     /* Next configuration in the state */
-  struct config *bp;       /* The next basis configuration */
-};
-
-enum e_action {
-  SHIFT,
-  ACCEPT,
-  REDUCE,
-  ERROR,
-  SSCONFLICT,              /* A shift/shift conflict */
-  SRCONFLICT,              /* Was a reduce, but part of a conflict */
-  RRCONFLICT,              /* Was a reduce, but part of a conflict */
-  SH_RESOLVED,             /* Was a shift.  Precedence resolved conflict */
-  RD_RESOLVED,             /* Was reduce.  Precedence resolved conflict */
-  NOT_USED,                /* Deleted by compression */
-  SHIFTREDUCE              /* Shift first, then reduce */
-};
-
-/* Every shift or reduce operation is stored as one of the following */
-struct action {
-  struct symbol *sp;       /* The look-ahead symbol */
-  enum e_action type;
-  union {
-    struct state *stp;     /* The new state, if a shift */
-    struct rule *rp;       /* The rule, if a reduce */
-  } x;
-  struct symbol *spOpt;    /* SHIFTREDUCE optimization to this symbol */
-  struct action *next;     /* Next action for this state */
-  struct action *collide;  /* Next action with the same hash */
-};
-
-/* Each state of the generated parser's finite state machine
-** is encoded as an instance of the following structure. */
-struct state {
-  struct config *bp;       /* The basis configurations for this state */
-  struct config *cfp;      /* All configurations in this set */
-  int statenum;            /* Sequential number for this state */
-  struct action *ap;       /* List of actions for this state */
-  int nTknAct, nNtAct;     /* Number of actions on terminals and nonterminals */
-  int iTknOfst, iNtOfst;   /* yy_action[] offset for terminals and nonterms */
-  int iDfltReduce;         /* Default action is to REDUCE by this rule */
-  struct rule *pDfltReduce;/* The default REDUCE rule. */
-  int autoReduce;          /* True if this is an auto-reduce state */
-};
-#define NO_OFFSET (-2147483647)
-
-/* A followset propagation link indicates that the contents of one
-** configuration followset should be propagated to another whenever
-** the first changes. */
-struct plink {
-  struct config *cfp;      /* The configuration to which linked */
-  struct plink *next;      /* The next propagate link */
-};
-
-/* The state vector for the entire parser generator is recorded as
-** follows.  (LEMON uses no global variables and makes little use of
-** static variables.  Fields in the following structure can be thought
-** of as begin global variables in the program.) */
-struct lemon {
-  struct state **sorted;   /* Table of states sorted by state number */
-  struct rule *rule;       /* List of all rules */
-  struct rule *startRule;  /* First rule */
-  int nstate;              /* Number of states */
-  int nxstate;             /* nstate with tail degenerate states removed */
-  int nrule;               /* Number of rules */
-  int nsymbol;             /* Number of terminal and nonterminal symbols */
-  int nterminal;           /* Number of terminal symbols */
-  struct symbol **symbols; /* Sorted array of pointers to symbols */
-  int errorcnt;            /* Number of errors */
-  struct symbol *errsym;   /* The error symbol */
-  struct symbol *wildcard; /* Token that matches anything */
-  char *name;              /* Name of the generated parser */
-  char *arg;               /* Declaration of the 3th argument to parser */
-  char *tokentype;         /* Type of terminal symbols in the parser stack */
-  char *vartype;           /* The default type of non-terminal symbols */
-  char *start;             /* Name of the start symbol for the grammar */
-  char *stacksize;         /* Size of the parser stack */
-  char *include;           /* Code to put at the start of the C file */
-  char *error;             /* Code to execute when an error is seen */
-  char *overflow;          /* Code to execute on a stack overflow */
-  char *failure;           /* Code to execute on parser failure */
-  char *accept;            /* Code to execute when the parser excepts */
-  char *extracode;         /* Code appended to the generated file */
-  char *tokendest;         /* Code to execute to destroy token data */
-  char *vardest;           /* Code for the default non-terminal destructor */
-  char *filename;          /* Name of the input file */
-  char *outname;           /* Name of the current output file */
-  char *tokenprefix;       /* A prefix added to token names in the .h file */
-  int nconflict;           /* Number of parsing conflicts */
-  int nactiontab;          /* Number of entries in the yy_action[] table */
-  int tablesize;           /* Total table size of all tables in bytes */
-  int basisflag;           /* Print only basis configurations */
-  int has_fallback;        /* True if any %fallback is seen in the grammar */
-  int nolinenosflag;       /* True if #line statements should not be printed */
-  char *argv0;             /* Name of the program */
-};
-
-#define MemoryCheck(X) if((X)==0){ \
-  extern void memory_error(); \
-  memory_error(); \
-}
-
-/**************** From the file "table.h" *********************************/
-/*
-** All code in this file has been automatically generated
-** from a specification in the file
-**              "table.q"
-** by the associative array code building program "aagen".
-** Do not edit this file!  Instead, edit the specification
-** file, then rerun aagen.
-*/
-/*
-** Code for processing tables in the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-/* Routines for handling a strings */
-
-const char *Strsafe(const char *);
-
-void Strsafe_init(void);
-int Strsafe_insert(const char *);
-const char *Strsafe_find(const char *);
-
-/* Routines for handling symbols of the grammar */
-
-struct symbol *Symbol_new(const char *);
-int Symbolcmpp(const void *, const void *);
-void Symbol_init(void);
-int Symbol_insert(struct symbol *, const char *);
-struct symbol *Symbol_find(const char *);
-struct symbol *Symbol_Nth(int);
-int Symbol_count(void);
-struct symbol **Symbol_arrayof(void);
-
-/* Routines to manage the state table */
-
-int Configcmp(const char *, const char *);
-struct state *State_new(void);
-void State_init(void);
-int State_insert(struct state *, struct config *);
-struct state *State_find(struct config *);
-struct state **State_arrayof(void);
-
-/* Routines used for efficiency in Configlist_add */
-
-void Configtable_init(void);
-int Configtable_insert(struct config *);
-struct config *Configtable_find(struct config *);
-void Configtable_clear(int(*)(struct config *));
-
-/****************** From the file "action.c" *******************************/
-/*
-** Routines processing parser actions in the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-
-/* Allocate a new parser action */
-static struct action *Action_new(void){
-  static struct action *freelist = 0;
-  struct action *newaction;
-
-  if( freelist==0 ){
-    int i;
-    int amt = 100;
-    freelist = (struct action *)calloc(amt, sizeof(struct action));
-    if( freelist==0 ){
-      fprintf(stderr,"Unable to allocate memory for a new parser action.");
-      exit(1);
-    }
-    for(i=0; i<amt-1; i++) freelist[i].next = &freelist[i+1];
-    freelist[amt-1].next = 0;
-  }
-  newaction = freelist;
-  freelist = freelist->next;
-  return newaction;
-}
-
-/* Compare two actions for sorting purposes.  Return negative, zero, or
-** positive if the first action is less than, equal to, or greater than
-** the first
-*/
-static int actioncmp(
-  struct action *ap1,
-  struct action *ap2
-){
-  int rc;
-  rc = ap1->sp->index - ap2->sp->index;
-  if( rc==0 ){
-    rc = (int)ap1->type - (int)ap2->type;
-  }
-  if( rc==0 && (ap1->type==REDUCE || ap1->type==SHIFTREDUCE) ){
-    rc = ap1->x.rp->index - ap2->x.rp->index;
-  }
-  if( rc==0 ){
-    rc = (int) (ap2 - ap1);
-  }
-  return rc;
-}
-
-/* Sort parser actions */
-static struct action *Action_sort(
-  struct action *ap
-){
-  ap = (struct action *)msort((char *)ap,(char **)&ap->next,
-                              (int(*)(const char*,const char*))actioncmp);
-  return ap;
-}
-
-void Action_add(
-  struct action **app,
-  enum e_action type,
-  struct symbol *sp,
-  char *arg
-){
-  struct action *newaction;
-  newaction = Action_new();
-  newaction->next = *app;
-  *app = newaction;
-  newaction->type = type;
-  newaction->sp = sp;
-  newaction->spOpt = 0;
-  if( type==SHIFT ){
-    newaction->x.stp = (struct state *)arg;
-  }else{
-    newaction->x.rp = (struct rule *)arg;
-  }
-}
-/********************** New code to implement the "acttab" module ***********/
-/*
-** This module implements routines use to construct the yy_action[] table.
-*/
-
-/*
-** The state of the yy_action table under construction is an instance of
-** the following structure.
-**
-** The yy_action table maps the pair (state_number, lookahead) into an
-** action_number.  The table is an array of integers pairs.  The state_number
-** determines an initial offset into the yy_action array.  The lookahead
-** value is then added to this initial offset to get an index X into the
-** yy_action array. If the aAction[X].lookahead equals the value of the
-** of the lookahead input, then the value of the action_number output is
-** aAction[X].action.  If the lookaheads do not match then the
-** default action for the state_number is returned.
-**
-** All actions associated with a single state_number are first entered
-** into aLookahead[] using multiple calls to acttab_action().  Then the
-** actions for that single state_number are placed into the aAction[]
-** array with a single call to acttab_insert().  The acttab_insert() call
-** also resets the aLookahead[] array in preparation for the next
-** state number.
-*/
-struct lookahead_action {
-  int lookahead;             /* Value of the lookahead token */
-  int action;                /* Action to take on the given lookahead */
-};
-typedef struct acttab acttab;
-struct acttab {
-  int nAction;                 /* Number of used slots in aAction[] */
-  int nActionAlloc;            /* Slots allocated for aAction[] */
-  struct lookahead_action
-    *aAction,                  /* The yy_action[] table under construction */
-    *aLookahead;               /* A single new transaction set */
-  int mnLookahead;             /* Minimum aLookahead[].lookahead */
-  int mnAction;                /* Action associated with mnLookahead */
-  int mxLookahead;             /* Maximum aLookahead[].lookahead */
-  int nLookahead;              /* Used slots in aLookahead[] */
-  int nLookaheadAlloc;         /* Slots allocated in aLookahead[] */
-};
-
-/* Return the number of entries in the yy_action table */
-#define acttab_size(X) ((X)->nAction)
-
-/* The value for the N-th entry in yy_action */
-#define acttab_yyaction(X,N)  ((X)->aAction[N].action)
-
-/* The value for the N-th entry in yy_lookahead */
-#define acttab_yylookahead(X,N)  ((X)->aAction[N].lookahead)
-
-/* Free all memory associated with the given acttab */
-void acttab_free(acttab *p){
-  free( p->aAction );
-  free( p->aLookahead );
-  free( p );
-}
-
-/* Allocate a new acttab structure */
-acttab *acttab_alloc(void){
-  acttab *p = (acttab *) calloc( 1, sizeof(*p) );
-  if( p==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"Unable to allocate memory for a new acttab.");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-  memset(p, 0, sizeof(*p));
-  return p;
-}
-
-/* Add a new action to the current transaction set.
-**
-** This routine is called once for each lookahead for a particular
-** state.
-*/
-void acttab_action(acttab *p, int lookahead, int action){
-  if( p->nLookahead>=p->nLookaheadAlloc ){
-    p->nLookaheadAlloc += 25;
-    p->aLookahead = (struct lookahead_action *) realloc( p->aLookahead,
-                             sizeof(p->aLookahead[0])*p->nLookaheadAlloc );
-    if( p->aLookahead==0 ){
-      fprintf(stderr,"malloc failed\n");
-      exit(1);
-    }
-  }
-  if( p->nLookahead==0 ){
-    p->mxLookahead = lookahead;
-    p->mnLookahead = lookahead;
-    p->mnAction = action;
-  }else{
-    if( p->mxLookahead<lookahead ) p->mxLookahead = lookahead;
-    if( p->mnLookahead>lookahead ){
-      p->mnLookahead = lookahead;
-      p->mnAction = action;
-    }
-  }
-  p->aLookahead[p->nLookahead].lookahead = lookahead;
-  p->aLookahead[p->nLookahead].action = action;
-  p->nLookahead++;
-}
-
-/*
-** Add the transaction set built up with prior calls to acttab_action()
-** into the current action table.  Then reset the transaction set back
-** to an empty set in preparation for a new round of acttab_action() calls.
-**
-** Return the offset into the action table of the new transaction.
-*/
-int acttab_insert(acttab *p){
-  int i, j, k, n;
-  assert( p->nLookahead>0 );
-
-  /* Make sure we have enough space to hold the expanded action table
-  ** in the worst case.  The worst case occurs if the transaction set
-  ** must be appended to the current action table
-  */
-  n = p->mxLookahead + 1;
-  if( p->nAction + n >= p->nActionAlloc ){
-    int oldAlloc = p->nActionAlloc;
-    p->nActionAlloc = p->nAction + n + p->nActionAlloc + 20;
-    p->aAction = (struct lookahead_action *) realloc( p->aAction,
-                          sizeof(p->aAction[0])*p->nActionAlloc);
-    if( p->aAction==0 ){
-      fprintf(stderr,"malloc failed\n");
-      exit(1);
-    }
-    for(i=oldAlloc; i<p->nActionAlloc; i++){
-      p->aAction[i].lookahead = -1;
-      p->aAction[i].action = -1;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Scan the existing action table looking for an offset that is a
-  ** duplicate of the current transaction set.  Fall out of the loop
-  ** if and when the duplicate is found.
-  **
-  ** i is the index in p->aAction[] where p->mnLookahead is inserted.
-  */
-  for(i=p->nAction-1; i>=0; i--){
-    if( p->aAction[i].lookahead==p->mnLookahead ){
-      /* All lookaheads and actions in the aLookahead[] transaction
-      ** must match against the candidate aAction[i] entry. */
-      if( p->aAction[i].action!=p->mnAction ) continue;
-      for(j=0; j<p->nLookahead; j++){
-        k = p->aLookahead[j].lookahead - p->mnLookahead + i;
-        if( k<0 || k>=p->nAction ) break;
-        if( p->aLookahead[j].lookahead!=p->aAction[k].lookahead ) break;
-        if( p->aLookahead[j].action!=p->aAction[k].action ) break;
-      }
-      if( j<p->nLookahead ) continue;
-
-      /* No possible lookahead value that is not in the aLookahead[]
-      ** transaction is allowed to match aAction[i] */
-      n = 0;
-      for(j=0; j<p->nAction; j++){
-        if( p->aAction[j].lookahead<0 ) continue;
-        if( p->aAction[j].lookahead==j+p->mnLookahead-i ) n++;
-      }
-      if( n==p->nLookahead ){
-        break;  /* An exact match is found at offset i */
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* If no existing offsets exactly match the current transaction, find an
-  ** an empty offset in the aAction[] table in which we can add the
-  ** aLookahead[] transaction.
-  */
-  if( i<0 ){
-    /* Look for holes in the aAction[] table that fit the current
-    ** aLookahead[] transaction.  Leave i set to the offset of the hole.
-    ** If no holes are found, i is left at p->nAction, which means the
-    ** transaction will be appended. */
-    for(i=0; i<p->nActionAlloc - p->mxLookahead; i++){
-      if( p->aAction[i].lookahead<0 ){
-        for(j=0; j<p->nLookahead; j++){
-          k = p->aLookahead[j].lookahead - p->mnLookahead + i;
-          if( k<0 ) break;
-          if( p->aAction[k].lookahead>=0 ) break;
-        }
-        if( j<p->nLookahead ) continue;
-        for(j=0; j<p->nAction; j++){
-          if( p->aAction[j].lookahead==j+p->mnLookahead-i ) break;
-        }
-        if( j==p->nAction ){
-          break;  /* Fits in empty slots */
-        }
-      }
-    }
-  }
-  /* Insert transaction set at index i. */
-  for(j=0; j<p->nLookahead; j++){
-    k = p->aLookahead[j].lookahead - p->mnLookahead + i;
-    p->aAction[k] = p->aLookahead[j];
-    if( k>=p->nAction ) p->nAction = k+1;
-  }
-  p->nLookahead = 0;
-
-  /* Return the offset that is added to the lookahead in order to get the
-  ** index into yy_action of the action */
-  return i - p->mnLookahead;
-}
-
-/********************** From the file "build.c" *****************************/
-/*
-** Routines to construction the finite state machine for the LEMON
-** parser generator.
-*/
-
-/* Find a precedence symbol of every rule in the grammar.
-**
-** Those rules which have a precedence symbol coded in the input
-** grammar using the "[symbol]" construct will already have the
-** rp->precsym field filled.  Other rules take as their precedence
-** symbol the first RHS symbol with a defined precedence.  If there
-** are not RHS symbols with a defined precedence, the precedence
-** symbol field is left blank.
-*/
-void FindRulePrecedences(struct lemon *xp)
-{
-  struct rule *rp;
-  for(rp=xp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    if( rp->precsym==0 ){
-      int i, j;
-      for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs && rp->precsym==0; i++){
-        struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[i];
-        if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
-          for(j=0; j<sp->nsubsym; j++){
-            if( sp->subsym[j]->prec>=0 ){
-              rp->precsym = sp->subsym[j];
-              break;
-            }
-          }
-        }else if( sp->prec>=0 ){
-          rp->precsym = rp->rhs[i];
-        }
-      }
-    }
-  }
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Find all nonterminals which will generate the empty string.
-** Then go back and compute the first sets of every nonterminal.
-** The first set is the set of all terminal symbols which can begin
-** a string generated by that nonterminal.
-*/
-void FindFirstSets(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  int i, j;
-  struct rule *rp;
-  int progress;
-
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-    lemp->symbols[i]->lambda = LEMON_FALSE;
-  }
-  for(i=lemp->nterminal; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-    lemp->symbols[i]->firstset = SetNew();
-  }
-
-  /* First compute all lambdas */
-  do{
-    progress = 0;
-    for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-      if( rp->lhs->lambda ) continue;
-      for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
-        struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[i];
-        assert( sp->type==NONTERMINAL || sp->lambda==LEMON_FALSE );
-        if( sp->lambda==LEMON_FALSE ) break;
-      }
-      if( i==rp->nrhs ){
-        rp->lhs->lambda = LEMON_TRUE;
-        progress = 1;
-      }
-    }
-  }while( progress );
-
-  /* Now compute all first sets */
-  do{
-    struct symbol *s1, *s2;
-    progress = 0;
-    for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-      s1 = rp->lhs;
-      for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
-        s2 = rp->rhs[i];
-        if( s2->type==TERMINAL ){
-          progress += SetAdd(s1->firstset,s2->index);
-          break;
-        }else if( s2->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
-          for(j=0; j<s2->nsubsym; j++){
-            progress += SetAdd(s1->firstset,s2->subsym[j]->index);
-          }
-          break;
-        }else if( s1==s2 ){
-          if( s1->lambda==LEMON_FALSE ) break;
-        }else{
-          progress += SetUnion(s1->firstset,s2->firstset);
-          if( s2->lambda==LEMON_FALSE ) break;
-        }
-      }
-    }
-  }while( progress );
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Compute all LR(0) states for the grammar.  Links
-** are added to between some states so that the LR(1) follow sets
-** can be computed later.
-*/
-PRIVATE struct state *getstate(struct lemon *);  /* forward reference */
-void FindStates(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  struct symbol *sp;
-  struct rule *rp;
-
-  Configlist_init();
-
-  /* Find the start symbol */
-  if( lemp->start ){
-    sp = Symbol_find(lemp->start);
-    if( sp==0 ){
-      ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,0,
-"The specified start symbol \"%s\" is not \
-in a nonterminal of the grammar.  \"%s\" will be used as the start \
-symbol instead.",lemp->start,lemp->startRule->lhs->name);
-      lemp->errorcnt++;
-      sp = lemp->startRule->lhs;
-    }
-  }else{
-    sp = lemp->startRule->lhs;
-  }
-
-  /* Make sure the start symbol doesn't occur on the right-hand side of
-  ** any rule.  Report an error if it does.  (YACC would generate a new
-  ** start symbol in this case.) */
-  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    int i;
-    for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
-      if( rp->rhs[i]==sp ){   /* FIX ME:  Deal with multiterminals */
-        ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,0,
-"The start symbol \"%s\" occurs on the \
-right-hand side of a rule. This will result in a parser which \
-does not work properly.",sp->name);
-        lemp->errorcnt++;
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* The basis configuration set for the first state
-  ** is all rules which have the start symbol as their
-  ** left-hand side */
-  for(rp=sp->rule; rp; rp=rp->nextlhs){
-    struct config *newcfp;
-    rp->lhsStart = 1;
-    newcfp = Configlist_addbasis(rp,0);
-    SetAdd(newcfp->fws,0);
-  }
-
-  /* Compute the first state.  All other states will be
-  ** computed automatically during the computation of the first one.
-  ** The returned pointer to the first state is not used. */
-  (void)getstate(lemp);
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Return a pointer to a state which is described by the configuration
-** list which has been built from calls to Configlist_add.
-*/
-PRIVATE void buildshifts(struct lemon *, struct state *); /* Forwd ref */
-PRIVATE struct state *getstate(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  struct config *cfp, *bp;
-  struct state *stp;
-
-  /* Extract the sorted basis of the new state.  The basis was constructed
-  ** by prior calls to "Configlist_addbasis()". */
-  Configlist_sortbasis();
-  bp = Configlist_basis();
-
-  /* Get a state with the same basis */
-  stp = State_find(bp);
-  if( stp ){
-    /* A state with the same basis already exists!  Copy all the follow-set
-    ** propagation links from the state under construction into the
-    ** preexisting state, then return a pointer to the preexisting state */
-    struct config *x, *y;
-    for(x=bp, y=stp->bp; x && y; x=x->bp, y=y->bp){
-      Plink_copy(&y->bplp,x->bplp);
-      Plink_delete(x->fplp);
-      x->fplp = x->bplp = 0;
-    }
-    cfp = Configlist_return();
-    Configlist_eat(cfp);
-  }else{
-    /* This really is a new state.  Construct all the details */
-    Configlist_closure(lemp);    /* Compute the configuration closure */
-    Configlist_sort();           /* Sort the configuration closure */
-    cfp = Configlist_return();   /* Get a pointer to the config list */
-    stp = State_new();           /* A new state structure */
-    MemoryCheck(stp);
-    stp->bp = bp;                /* Remember the configuration basis */
-    stp->cfp = cfp;              /* Remember the configuration closure */
-    stp->statenum = lemp->nstate++; /* Every state gets a sequence number */
-    stp->ap = 0;                 /* No actions, yet. */
-    State_insert(stp,stp->bp);   /* Add to the state table */
-    buildshifts(lemp,stp);       /* Recursively compute successor states */
-  }
-  return stp;
-}
-
-/*
-** Return true if two symbols are the same.
-*/
-int same_symbol(struct symbol *a, struct symbol *b)
-{
-  int i;
-  if( a==b ) return 1;
-  if( a->type!=MULTITERMINAL ) return 0;
-  if( b->type!=MULTITERMINAL ) return 0;
-  if( a->nsubsym!=b->nsubsym ) return 0;
-  for(i=0; i<a->nsubsym; i++){
-    if( a->subsym[i]!=b->subsym[i] ) return 0;
-  }
-  return 1;
-}
-
-/* Construct all successor states to the given state.  A "successor"
-** state is any state which can be reached by a shift action.
-*/
-PRIVATE void buildshifts(struct lemon *lemp, struct state *stp)
-{
-  struct config *cfp;  /* For looping thru the config closure of "stp" */
-  struct config *bcfp; /* For the inner loop on config closure of "stp" */
-  struct config *newcfg;  /* */
-  struct symbol *sp;   /* Symbol following the dot in configuration "cfp" */
-  struct symbol *bsp;  /* Symbol following the dot in configuration "bcfp" */
-  struct state *newstp; /* A pointer to a successor state */
-
-  /* Each configuration becomes complete after it contributes to a successor
-  ** state.  Initially, all configurations are incomplete */
-  for(cfp=stp->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next) cfp->status = INCOMPLETE;
-
-  /* Loop through all configurations of the state "stp" */
-  for(cfp=stp->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
-    if( cfp->status==COMPLETE ) continue;    /* Already used by inner loop */
-    if( cfp->dot>=cfp->rp->nrhs ) continue;  /* Can't shift this config */
-    Configlist_reset();                      /* Reset the new config set */
-    sp = cfp->rp->rhs[cfp->dot];             /* Symbol after the dot */
-
-    /* For every configuration in the state "stp" which has the symbol "sp"
-    ** following its dot, add the same configuration to the basis set under
-    ** construction but with the dot shifted one symbol to the right. */
-    for(bcfp=cfp; bcfp; bcfp=bcfp->next){
-      if( bcfp->status==COMPLETE ) continue;    /* Already used */
-      if( bcfp->dot>=bcfp->rp->nrhs ) continue; /* Can't shift this one */
-      bsp = bcfp->rp->rhs[bcfp->dot];           /* Get symbol after dot */
-      if( !same_symbol(bsp,sp) ) continue;      /* Must be same as for "cfp" */
-      bcfp->status = COMPLETE;                  /* Mark this config as used */
-      newcfg = Configlist_addbasis(bcfp->rp,bcfp->dot+1);
-      Plink_add(&newcfg->bplp,bcfp);
-    }
-
-    /* Get a pointer to the state described by the basis configuration set
-    ** constructed in the preceding loop */
-    newstp = getstate(lemp);
-
-    /* The state "newstp" is reached from the state "stp" by a shift action
-    ** on the symbol "sp" */
-    if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
-      int i;
-      for(i=0; i<sp->nsubsym; i++){
-        Action_add(&stp->ap,SHIFT,sp->subsym[i],(char*)newstp);
-      }
-    }else{
-      Action_add(&stp->ap,SHIFT,sp,(char *)newstp);
-    }
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** Construct the propagation links
-*/
-void FindLinks(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  int i;
-  struct config *cfp, *other;
-  struct state *stp;
-  struct plink *plp;
-
-  /* Housekeeping detail:
-  ** Add to every propagate link a pointer back to the state to
-  ** which the link is attached. */
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    for(cfp=stp->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
-      cfp->stp = stp;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Convert all backlinks into forward links.  Only the forward
-  ** links are used in the follow-set computation. */
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    for(cfp=stp->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
-      for(plp=cfp->bplp; plp; plp=plp->next){
-        other = plp->cfp;
-        Plink_add(&other->fplp,cfp);
-      }
-    }
-  }
-}
-
-/* Compute all followsets.
-**
-** A followset is the set of all symbols which can come immediately
-** after a configuration.
-*/
-void FindFollowSets(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  int i;
-  struct config *cfp;
-  struct plink *plp;
-  int progress;
-  int change;
-
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    for(cfp=lemp->sorted[i]->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
-      cfp->status = INCOMPLETE;
-    }
-  }
-
-  do{
-    progress = 0;
-    for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-      for(cfp=lemp->sorted[i]->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
-        if( cfp->status==COMPLETE ) continue;
-        for(plp=cfp->fplp; plp; plp=plp->next){
-          change = SetUnion(plp->cfp->fws,cfp->fws);
-          if( change ){
-            plp->cfp->status = INCOMPLETE;
-            progress = 1;
-          }
-        }
-        cfp->status = COMPLETE;
-      }
-    }
-  }while( progress );
-}
-
-static int resolve_conflict(struct action *,struct action *);
-
-/* Compute the reduce actions, and resolve conflicts.
-*/
-void FindActions(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  int i,j;
-  struct config *cfp;
-  struct state *stp;
-  struct symbol *sp;
-  struct rule *rp;
-
-  /* Add all of the reduce actions
-  ** A reduce action is added for each element of the followset of
-  ** a configuration which has its dot at the extreme right.
-  */
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){   /* Loop over all states */
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    for(cfp=stp->cfp; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){  /* Loop over all configurations */
-      if( cfp->rp->nrhs==cfp->dot ){        /* Is dot at extreme right? */
-        for(j=0; j<lemp->nterminal; j++){
-          if( SetFind(cfp->fws,j) ){
-            /* Add a reduce action to the state "stp" which will reduce by the
-            ** rule "cfp->rp" if the lookahead symbol is "lemp->symbols[j]" */
-            Action_add(&stp->ap,REDUCE,lemp->symbols[j],(char *)cfp->rp);
-          }
-        }
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Add the accepting token */
-  if( lemp->start ){
-    sp = Symbol_find(lemp->start);
-    if( sp==0 ) sp = lemp->startRule->lhs;
-  }else{
-    sp = lemp->startRule->lhs;
-  }
-  /* Add to the first state (which is always the starting state of the
-  ** finite state machine) an action to ACCEPT if the lookahead is the
-  ** start nonterminal.  */
-  Action_add(&lemp->sorted[0]->ap,ACCEPT,sp,0);
-
-  /* Resolve conflicts */
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    struct action *ap, *nap;
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    /* assert( stp->ap ); */
-    stp->ap = Action_sort(stp->ap);
-    for(ap=stp->ap; ap && ap->next; ap=ap->next){
-      for(nap=ap->next; nap && nap->sp==ap->sp; nap=nap->next){
-         /* The two actions "ap" and "nap" have the same lookahead.
-         ** Figure out which one should be used */
-         lemp->nconflict += resolve_conflict(ap,nap);
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Report an error for each rule that can never be reduced. */
-  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next) rp->canReduce = LEMON_FALSE;
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    struct action *ap;
-    for(ap=lemp->sorted[i]->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-      if( ap->type==REDUCE ) ap->x.rp->canReduce = LEMON_TRUE;
-    }
-  }
-  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    if( rp->canReduce ) continue;
-    ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,"This rule can not be reduced.\n");
-    lemp->errorcnt++;
-  }
-}
-
-/* Resolve a conflict between the two given actions.  If the
-** conflict can't be resolved, return non-zero.
-**
-** NO LONGER TRUE:
-**   To resolve a conflict, first look to see if either action
-**   is on an error rule.  In that case, take the action which
-**   is not associated with the error rule.  If neither or both
-**   actions are associated with an error rule, then try to
-**   use precedence to resolve the conflict.
-**
-** If either action is a SHIFT, then it must be apx.  This
-** function won't work if apx->type==REDUCE and apy->type==SHIFT.
-*/
-static int resolve_conflict(
-  struct action *apx,
-  struct action *apy
-){
-  struct symbol *spx, *spy;
-  int errcnt = 0;
-  assert( apx->sp==apy->sp );  /* Otherwise there would be no conflict */
-  if( apx->type==SHIFT && apy->type==SHIFT ){
-    apy->type = SSCONFLICT;
-    errcnt++;
-  }
-  if( apx->type==SHIFT && apy->type==REDUCE ){
-    spx = apx->sp;
-    spy = apy->x.rp->precsym;
-    if( spy==0 || spx->prec<0 || spy->prec<0 ){
-      /* Not enough precedence information. */
-      apy->type = SRCONFLICT;
-      errcnt++;
-    }else if( spx->prec>spy->prec ){    /* higher precedence wins */
-      apy->type = RD_RESOLVED;
-    }else if( spx->prec<spy->prec ){
-      apx->type = SH_RESOLVED;
-    }else if( spx->prec==spy->prec && spx->assoc==RIGHT ){ /* Use operator */
-      apy->type = RD_RESOLVED;                             /* associativity */
-    }else if( spx->prec==spy->prec && spx->assoc==LEFT ){  /* to break tie */
-      apx->type = SH_RESOLVED;
-    }else{
-      assert( spx->prec==spy->prec && spx->assoc==NONE );
-      apx->type = ERROR;
-    }
-  }else if( apx->type==REDUCE && apy->type==REDUCE ){
-    spx = apx->x.rp->precsym;
-    spy = apy->x.rp->precsym;
-    if( spx==0 || spy==0 || spx->prec<0 ||
-    spy->prec<0 || spx->prec==spy->prec ){
-      apy->type = RRCONFLICT;
-      errcnt++;
-    }else if( spx->prec>spy->prec ){
-      apy->type = RD_RESOLVED;
-    }else if( spx->prec<spy->prec ){
-      apx->type = RD_RESOLVED;
-    }
-  }else{
-    assert(
-      apx->type==SH_RESOLVED ||
-      apx->type==RD_RESOLVED ||
-      apx->type==SSCONFLICT ||
-      apx->type==SRCONFLICT ||
-      apx->type==RRCONFLICT ||
-      apy->type==SH_RESOLVED ||
-      apy->type==RD_RESOLVED ||
-      apy->type==SSCONFLICT ||
-      apy->type==SRCONFLICT ||
-      apy->type==RRCONFLICT
-    );
-    /* The REDUCE/SHIFT case cannot happen because SHIFTs come before
-    ** REDUCEs on the list.  If we reach this point it must be because
-    ** the parser conflict had already been resolved. */
-  }
-  return errcnt;
-}
-/********************* From the file "configlist.c" *************************/
-/*
-** Routines to processing a configuration list and building a state
-** in the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-
-static struct config *freelist = 0;      /* List of free configurations */
-static struct config *current = 0;       /* Top of list of configurations */
-static struct config **currentend = 0;   /* Last on list of configs */
-static struct config *basis = 0;         /* Top of list of basis configs */
-static struct config **basisend = 0;     /* End of list of basis configs */
-
-/* Return a pointer to a new configuration */
-PRIVATE struct config *newconfig(void){
-  struct config *newcfg;
-  if( freelist==0 ){
-    int i;
-    int amt = 3;
-    freelist = (struct config *)calloc( amt, sizeof(struct config) );
-    if( freelist==0 ){
-      fprintf(stderr,"Unable to allocate memory for a new configuration.");
-      exit(1);
-    }
-    for(i=0; i<amt-1; i++) freelist[i].next = &freelist[i+1];
-    freelist[amt-1].next = 0;
-  }
-  newcfg = freelist;
-  freelist = freelist->next;
-  return newcfg;
-}
-
-/* The configuration "old" is no longer used */
-PRIVATE void deleteconfig(struct config *old)
-{
-  old->next = freelist;
-  freelist = old;
-}
-
-/* Initialized the configuration list builder */
-void Configlist_init(void){
-  current = 0;
-  currentend = &current;
-  basis = 0;
-  basisend = &basis;
-  Configtable_init();
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Initialized the configuration list builder */
-void Configlist_reset(void){
-  current = 0;
-  currentend = &current;
-  basis = 0;
-  basisend = &basis;
-  Configtable_clear(0);
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Add another configuration to the configuration list */
-struct config *Configlist_add(
-  struct rule *rp,    /* The rule */
-  int dot             /* Index into the RHS of the rule where the dot goes */
-){
-  struct config *cfp, model;
-
-  assert( currentend!=0 );
-  model.rp = rp;
-  model.dot = dot;
-  cfp = Configtable_find(&model);
-  if( cfp==0 ){
-    cfp = newconfig();
-    cfp->rp = rp;
-    cfp->dot = dot;
-    cfp->fws = SetNew();
-    cfp->stp = 0;
-    cfp->fplp = cfp->bplp = 0;
-    cfp->next = 0;
-    cfp->bp = 0;
-    *currentend = cfp;
-    currentend = &cfp->next;
-    Configtable_insert(cfp);
-  }
-  return cfp;
-}
-
-/* Add a basis configuration to the configuration list */
-struct config *Configlist_addbasis(struct rule *rp, int dot)
-{
-  struct config *cfp, model;
-
-  assert( basisend!=0 );
-  assert( currentend!=0 );
-  model.rp = rp;
-  model.dot = dot;
-  cfp = Configtable_find(&model);
-  if( cfp==0 ){
-    cfp = newconfig();
-    cfp->rp = rp;
-    cfp->dot = dot;
-    cfp->fws = SetNew();
-    cfp->stp = 0;
-    cfp->fplp = cfp->bplp = 0;
-    cfp->next = 0;
-    cfp->bp = 0;
-    *currentend = cfp;
-    currentend = &cfp->next;
-    *basisend = cfp;
-    basisend = &cfp->bp;
-    Configtable_insert(cfp);
-  }
-  return cfp;
-}
-
-/* Compute the closure of the configuration list */
-void Configlist_closure(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  struct config *cfp, *newcfp;
-  struct rule *rp, *newrp;
-  struct symbol *sp, *xsp;
-  int i, dot;
-
-  assert( currentend!=0 );
-  for(cfp=current; cfp; cfp=cfp->next){
-    rp = cfp->rp;
-    dot = cfp->dot;
-    if( dot>=rp->nrhs ) continue;
-    sp = rp->rhs[dot];
-    if( sp->type==NONTERMINAL ){
-      if( sp->rule==0 && sp!=lemp->errsym ){
-        ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->line,"Nonterminal \"%s\" has no rules.",
-          sp->name);
-        lemp->errorcnt++;
-      }
-      for(newrp=sp->rule; newrp; newrp=newrp->nextlhs){
-        newcfp = Configlist_add(newrp,0);
-        for(i=dot+1; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
-          xsp = rp->rhs[i];
-          if( xsp->type==TERMINAL ){
-            SetAdd(newcfp->fws,xsp->index);
-            break;
-          }else if( xsp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
-            int k;
-            for(k=0; k<xsp->nsubsym; k++){
-              SetAdd(newcfp->fws, xsp->subsym[k]->index);
-            }
-            break;
-          }else{
-            SetUnion(newcfp->fws,xsp->firstset);
-            if( xsp->lambda==LEMON_FALSE ) break;
-          }
-        }
-        if( i==rp->nrhs ) Plink_add(&cfp->fplp,newcfp);
-      }
-    }
-  }
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Sort the configuration list */
-void Configlist_sort(void){
-  current = (struct config*)msort((char*)current,(char**)&(current->next),
-                                  Configcmp);
-  currentend = 0;
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Sort the basis configuration list */
-void Configlist_sortbasis(void){
-  basis = (struct config*)msort((char*)current,(char**)&(current->bp),
-                                Configcmp);
-  basisend = 0;
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Return a pointer to the head of the configuration list and
-** reset the list */
-struct config *Configlist_return(void){
-  struct config *old;
-  old = current;
-  current = 0;
-  currentend = 0;
-  return old;
-}
-
-/* Return a pointer to the head of the configuration list and
-** reset the list */
-struct config *Configlist_basis(void){
-  struct config *old;
-  old = basis;
-  basis = 0;
-  basisend = 0;
-  return old;
-}
-
-/* Free all elements of the given configuration list */
-void Configlist_eat(struct config *cfp)
-{
-  struct config *nextcfp;
-  for(; cfp; cfp=nextcfp){
-    nextcfp = cfp->next;
-    assert( cfp->fplp==0 );
-    assert( cfp->bplp==0 );
-    if( cfp->fws ) SetFree(cfp->fws);
-    deleteconfig(cfp);
-  }
-  return;
-}
-/***************** From the file "error.c" *********************************/
-/*
-** Code for printing error message.
-*/
-
-void ErrorMsg(const char *filename, int lineno, const char *format, ...){
-  va_list ap;
-  fprintf(stderr, "%s:%d: ", filename, lineno);
-  va_start(ap, format);
-  vfprintf(stderr,format,ap);
-  va_end(ap);
-  fprintf(stderr, "\n");
-}
-/**************** From the file "main.c" ************************************/
-/*
-** Main program file for the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-
-/* Report an out-of-memory condition and abort.  This function
-** is used mostly by the "MemoryCheck" macro in struct.h
-*/
-void memory_error(void){
-  fprintf(stderr,"Out of memory.  Aborting...\n");
-  exit(1);
-}
-
-static int nDefine = 0;      /* Number of -D options on the command line */
-static char **azDefine = 0;  /* Name of the -D macros */
-
-/* This routine is called with the argument to each -D command-line option.
-** Add the macro defined to the azDefine array.
-*/
-static void handle_D_option(char *z){
-  char **paz;
-  nDefine++;
-  azDefine = (char **) realloc(azDefine, sizeof(azDefine[0])*nDefine);
-  if( azDefine==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"out of memory\n");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-  paz = &azDefine[nDefine-1];
-  *paz = (char *) malloc( lemonStrlen(z)+1 );
-  if( *paz==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"out of memory\n");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-  lemon_strcpy(*paz, z);
-  for(z=*paz; *z && *z!='='; z++){}
-  *z = 0;
-}
-
-static char *user_templatename = NULL;
-static void handle_T_option(char *z){
-  user_templatename = (char *) malloc( lemonStrlen(z)+1 );
-  if( user_templatename==0 ){
-    memory_error();
-  }
-  lemon_strcpy(user_templatename, z);
-}
-
-/* Merge together to lists of rules ordered by rule.iRule */
-static struct rule *Rule_merge(struct rule *pA, struct rule *pB){
-  struct rule *pFirst = 0;
-  struct rule **ppPrev = &pFirst;
-  while( pA && pB ){
-    if( pA->iRule<pB->iRule ){
-      *ppPrev = pA;
-      ppPrev = &pA->next;
-      pA = pA->next;
-    }else{
-      *ppPrev = pB;
-      ppPrev = &pB->next;
-      pB = pB->next;
-    }
-  }
-  if( pA ){
-    *ppPrev = pA;
-  }else{
-    *ppPrev = pB;
-  }
-  return pFirst;
-}
-
-/*
-** Sort a list of rules in order of increasing iRule value
-*/
-static struct rule *Rule_sort(struct rule *rp){
-  int i;
-  struct rule *pNext;
-  struct rule *x[32];
-  memset(x, 0, sizeof(x));
-  while( rp ){
-    pNext = rp->next;
-    rp->next = 0;
-    for(i=0; i<sizeof(x)/sizeof(x[0]) && x[i]; i++){
-      rp = Rule_merge(x[i], rp);
-      x[i] = 0;
-    }
-    x[i] = rp;
-    rp = pNext;
-  }
-  rp = 0;
-  for(i=0; i<sizeof(x)/sizeof(x[0]); i++){
-    rp = Rule_merge(x[i], rp);
-  }
-  return rp;
-}
-
-/* forward reference */
-static const char *minimum_size_type(int lwr, int upr, int *pnByte);
-
-/* Print a single line of the "Parser Stats" output
-*/
-static void stats_line(const char *zLabel, int iValue){
-  int nLabel = lemonStrlen(zLabel);
-  printf("  %s%.*s %5d\n", zLabel,
-         35-nLabel, "................................",
-         iValue);
-}
-
-/* The main program.  Parse the command line and do it... */
-int main(int argc, char **argv)
-{
-  static int version = 0;
-  static int rpflag = 0;
-  static int basisflag = 0;
-  static int compress = 0;
-  static int quiet = 0;
-  static int statistics = 0;
-  static int mhflag = 0;
-  static int nolinenosflag = 0;
-  static int noResort = 0;
-  static struct s_options options[] = {
-    {OPT_FLAG, "b", (char*)&basisflag, "Print only the basis in report."},
-    {OPT_FLAG, "c", (char*)&compress, "Don't compress the action table."},
-    {OPT_FSTR, "D", (char*)handle_D_option, "Define an %ifdef macro."},
-    {OPT_FSTR, "f", 0, "Ignored.  (Placeholder for -f compiler options.)"},
-    {OPT_FLAG, "g", (char*)&rpflag, "Print grammar without actions."},
-    {OPT_FSTR, "I", 0, "Ignored.  (Placeholder for '-I' compiler options.)"},
-    {OPT_FLAG, "m", (char*)&mhflag, "Output a makeheaders compatible file."},
-    {OPT_FLAG, "l", (char*)&nolinenosflag, "Do not print #line statements."},
-    {OPT_FSTR, "O", 0, "Ignored.  (Placeholder for '-O' compiler options.)"},
-    {OPT_FLAG, "p", (char*)&showPrecedenceConflict,
-                    "Show conflicts resolved by precedence rules"},
-    {OPT_FLAG, "q", (char*)&quiet, "(Quiet) Don't print the report file."},
-    {OPT_FLAG, "r", (char*)&noResort, "Do not sort or renumber states"},
-    {OPT_FLAG, "s", (char*)&statistics,
-                                   "Print parser stats to standard output."},
-    {OPT_FLAG, "x", (char*)&version, "Print the version number."},
-    {OPT_FSTR, "T", (char*)handle_T_option, "Specify a template file."},
-    {OPT_FSTR, "W", 0, "Ignored.  (Placeholder for '-W' compiler options.)"},
-    {OPT_FLAG,0,0,0}
-  };
-  int i;
-  int exitcode;
-  struct lemon lem;
-  struct rule *rp;
-
-  OptInit(argv,options,stderr);
-  if( version ){
-     printf("Lemon version 1.0\n");
-     exit(0);
-  }
-  if( OptNArgs()!=1 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"Exactly one filename argument is required.\n");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-  memset(&lem, 0, sizeof(lem));
-  lem.errorcnt = 0;
-
-  /* Initialize the machine */
-  Strsafe_init();
-  Symbol_init();
-  State_init();
-  lem.argv0 = argv[0];
-  lem.filename = OptArg(0);
-  lem.basisflag = basisflag;
-  lem.nolinenosflag = nolinenosflag;
-  Symbol_new("$");
-  lem.errsym = Symbol_new("error");
-  lem.errsym->useCnt = 0;
-
-  /* Parse the input file */
-  Parse(&lem);
-  if( lem.errorcnt ) exit(lem.errorcnt);
-  if( lem.nrule==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"Empty grammar.\n");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-
-  /* Count and index the symbols of the grammar */
-  Symbol_new("{default}");
-  lem.nsymbol = Symbol_count();
-  lem.symbols = Symbol_arrayof();
-  for(i=0; i<lem.nsymbol; i++) lem.symbols[i]->index = i;
-  qsort(lem.symbols,lem.nsymbol,sizeof(struct symbol*), Symbolcmpp);
-  for(i=0; i<lem.nsymbol; i++) lem.symbols[i]->index = i;
-  while( lem.symbols[i-1]->type==MULTITERMINAL ){ i--; }
-  assert( strcmp(lem.symbols[i-1]->name,"{default}")==0 );
-  lem.nsymbol = i - 1;
-  for(i=1; ISUPPER(lem.symbols[i]->name[0]); i++);
-  lem.nterminal = i;
-
-  /* Assign sequential rule numbers.  Start with 0.  Put rules that have no
-  ** reduce action C-code associated with them last, so that the switch()
-  ** statement that selects reduction actions will have a smaller jump table.
-  */
-  for(i=0, rp=lem.rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    rp->iRule = rp->code ? i++ : -1;
-  }
-  for(rp=lem.rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    if( rp->iRule<0 ) rp->iRule = i++;
-  }
-  lem.startRule = lem.rule;
-  lem.rule = Rule_sort(lem.rule);
-
-  /* Generate a reprint of the grammar, if requested on the command line */
-  if( rpflag ){
-    Reprint(&lem);
-  }else{
-    /* Initialize the size for all follow and first sets */
-    SetSize(lem.nterminal+1);
-
-    /* Find the precedence for every production rule (that has one) */
-    FindRulePrecedences(&lem);
-
-    /* Compute the lambda-nonterminals and the first-sets for every
-    ** nonterminal */
-    FindFirstSets(&lem);
-
-    /* Compute all LR(0) states.  Also record follow-set propagation
-    ** links so that the follow-set can be computed later */
-    lem.nstate = 0;
-    FindStates(&lem);
-    lem.sorted = State_arrayof();
-
-    /* Tie up loose ends on the propagation links */
-    FindLinks(&lem);
-
-    /* Compute the follow set of every reducible configuration */
-    FindFollowSets(&lem);
-
-    /* Compute the action tables */
-    FindActions(&lem);
-
-    /* Compress the action tables */
-    if( compress==0 ) CompressTables(&lem);
-
-    /* Reorder and renumber the states so that states with fewer choices
-    ** occur at the end.  This is an optimization that helps make the
-    ** generated parser tables smaller. */
-    if( noResort==0 ) ResortStates(&lem);
-
-    /* Generate a report of the parser generated.  (the "y.output" file) */
-    if( !quiet ) ReportOutput(&lem);
-
-    /* Generate the source code for the parser */
-    ReportTable(&lem, mhflag);
-
-    /* Produce a header file for use by the scanner.  (This step is
-    ** omitted if the "-m" option is used because makeheaders will
-    ** generate the file for us.) */
-    if( !mhflag ) ReportHeader(&lem);
-  }
-  if( statistics ){
-    printf("Parser statistics:\n");
-    stats_line("terminal symbols", lem.nterminal);
-    stats_line("non-terminal symbols", lem.nsymbol - lem.nterminal);
-    stats_line("total symbols", lem.nsymbol);
-    stats_line("rules", lem.nrule);
-    stats_line("states", lem.nxstate);
-    stats_line("conflicts", lem.nconflict);
-    stats_line("action table entries", lem.nactiontab);
-    stats_line("total table size (bytes)", lem.tablesize);
-  }
-  if( lem.nconflict > 0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"%d parsing conflicts.\n",lem.nconflict);
-  }
-
-  /* return 0 on success, 1 on failure. */
-  exitcode = ((lem.errorcnt > 0) || (lem.nconflict > 0)) ? 1 : 0;
-  exit(exitcode);
-  return (exitcode);
-}
-/******************** From the file "msort.c" *******************************/
-/*
-** A generic merge-sort program.
-**
-** USAGE:
-** Let "ptr" be a pointer to some structure which is at the head of
-** a null-terminated list.  Then to sort the list call:
-**
-**     ptr = msort(ptr,&(ptr->next),cmpfnc);
-**
-** In the above, "cmpfnc" is a pointer to a function which compares
-** two instances of the structure and returns an integer, as in
-** strcmp.  The second argument is a pointer to the pointer to the
-** second element of the linked list.  This address is used to compute
-** the offset to the "next" field within the structure.  The offset to
-** the "next" field must be constant for all structures in the list.
-**
-** The function returns a new pointer which is the head of the list
-** after sorting.
-**
-** ALGORITHM:
-** Merge-sort.
-*/
-
-/*
-** Return a pointer to the next structure in the linked list.
-*/
-#define NEXT(A) (*(char**)(((char*)A)+offset))
-
-/*
-** Inputs:
-**   a:       A sorted, null-terminated linked list.  (May be null).
-**   b:       A sorted, null-terminated linked list.  (May be null).
-**   cmp:     A pointer to the comparison function.
-**   offset:  Offset in the structure to the "next" field.
-**
-** Return Value:
-**   A pointer to the head of a sorted list containing the elements
-**   of both a and b.
-**
-** Side effects:
-**   The "next" pointers for elements in the lists a and b are
-**   changed.
-*/
-static char *merge(
-  char *a,
-  char *b,
-  int (*cmp)(const char*,const char*),
-  int offset
-){
-  char *ptr, *head;
-
-  if( a==0 ){
-    head = b;
-  }else if( b==0 ){
-    head = a;
-  }else{
-    if( (*cmp)(a,b)<=0 ){
-      ptr = a;
-      a = NEXT(a);
-    }else{
-      ptr = b;
-      b = NEXT(b);
-    }
-    head = ptr;
-    while( a && b ){
-      if( (*cmp)(a,b)<=0 ){
-        NEXT(ptr) = a;
-        ptr = a;
-        a = NEXT(a);
-      }else{
-        NEXT(ptr) = b;
-        ptr = b;
-        b = NEXT(b);
-      }
-    }
-    if( a ) NEXT(ptr) = a;
-    else    NEXT(ptr) = b;
-  }
-  return head;
-}
-
-/*
-** Inputs:
-**   list:      Pointer to a singly-linked list of structures.
-**   next:      Pointer to pointer to the second element of the list.
-**   cmp:       A comparison function.
-**
-** Return Value:
-**   A pointer to the head of a sorted list containing the elements
-**   originally in list.
-**
-** Side effects:
-**   The "next" pointers for elements in list are changed.
-*/
-#define LISTSIZE 30
-static char *msort(
-  char *list,
-  char **next,
-  int (*cmp)(const char*,const char*)
-){
-  unsigned long offset;
-  char *ep;
-  char *set[LISTSIZE];
-  int i;
-  offset = (unsigned long)((char*)next - (char*)list);
-  for(i=0; i<LISTSIZE; i++) set[i] = 0;
-  while( list ){
-    ep = list;
-    list = NEXT(list);
-    NEXT(ep) = 0;
-    for(i=0; i<LISTSIZE-1 && set[i]!=0; i++){
-      ep = merge(ep,set[i],cmp,offset);
-      set[i] = 0;
-    }
-    set[i] = ep;
-  }
-  ep = 0;
-  for(i=0; i<LISTSIZE; i++) if( set[i] ) ep = merge(set[i],ep,cmp,offset);
-  return ep;
-}
-/************************ From the file "option.c" **************************/
-static char **argv;
-static struct s_options *op;
-static FILE *errstream;
-
-#define ISOPT(X) ((X)[0]=='-'||(X)[0]=='+'||strchr((X),'=')!=0)
-
-/*
-** Print the command line with a carrot pointing to the k-th character
-** of the n-th field.
-*/
-static void errline(int n, int k, FILE *err)
-{
-  int spcnt, i;
-  if( argv[0] ) fprintf(err,"%s",argv[0]);
-  spcnt = lemonStrlen(argv[0]) + 1;
-  for(i=1; i<n && argv[i]; i++){
-    fprintf(err," %s",argv[i]);
-    spcnt += lemonStrlen(argv[i])+1;
-  }
-  spcnt += k;
-  for(; argv[i]; i++) fprintf(err," %s",argv[i]);
-  if( spcnt<20 ){
-    fprintf(err,"\n%*s^-- here\n",spcnt,"");
-  }else{
-    fprintf(err,"\n%*shere --^\n",spcnt-7,"");
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** Return the index of the N-th non-switch argument.  Return -1
-** if N is out of range.
-*/
-static int argindex(int n)
-{
-  int i;
-  int dashdash = 0;
-  if( argv!=0 && *argv!=0 ){
-    for(i=1; argv[i]; i++){
-      if( dashdash || !ISOPT(argv[i]) ){
-        if( n==0 ) return i;
-        n--;
-      }
-      if( strcmp(argv[i],"--")==0 ) dashdash = 1;
-    }
-  }
-  return -1;
-}
-
-static char emsg[] = "Command line syntax error: ";
-
-/*
-** Process a flag command line argument.
-*/
-static int handleflags(int i, FILE *err)
-{
-  int v;
-  int errcnt = 0;
-  int j;
-  for(j=0; op[j].label; j++){
-    if( strncmp(&argv[i][1],op[j].label,lemonStrlen(op[j].label))==0 ) break;
-  }
-  v = argv[i][0]=='-' ? 1 : 0;
-  if( op[j].label==0 ){
-    if( err ){
-      fprintf(err,"%sundefined option.\n",emsg);
-      errline(i,1,err);
-    }
-    errcnt++;
-  }else if( op[j].arg==0 ){
-    /* Ignore this option */
-  }else if( op[j].type==OPT_FLAG ){
-    *((int*)op[j].arg) = v;
-  }else if( op[j].type==OPT_FFLAG ){
-    (*(void(*)(int))(op[j].arg))(v);
-  }else if( op[j].type==OPT_FSTR ){
-    (*(void(*)(char *))(op[j].arg))(&argv[i][2]);
-  }else{
-    if( err ){
-      fprintf(err,"%smissing argument on switch.\n",emsg);
-      errline(i,1,err);
-    }
-    errcnt++;
-  }
-  return errcnt;
-}
-
-/*
-** Process a command line switch which has an argument.
-*/
-static int handleswitch(int i, FILE *err)
-{
-  int lv = 0;
-  double dv = 0.0;
-  char *sv = 0, *end;
-  char *cp;
-  int j;
-  int errcnt = 0;
-  cp = strchr(argv[i],'=');
-  assert( cp!=0 );
-  *cp = 0;
-  for(j=0; op[j].label; j++){
-    if( strcmp(argv[i],op[j].label)==0 ) break;
-  }
-  *cp = '=';
-  if( op[j].label==0 ){
-    if( err ){
-      fprintf(err,"%sundefined option.\n",emsg);
-      errline(i,0,err);
-    }
-    errcnt++;
-  }else{
-    cp++;
-    switch( op[j].type ){
-      case OPT_FLAG:
-      case OPT_FFLAG:
-        if( err ){
-          fprintf(err,"%soption requires an argument.\n",emsg);
-          errline(i,0,err);
-        }
-        errcnt++;
-        break;
-      case OPT_DBL:
-      case OPT_FDBL:
-        dv = strtod(cp,&end);
-        if( *end ){
-          if( err ){
-            fprintf(err,
-               "%sillegal character in floating-point argument.\n",emsg);
-            errline(i,(int)((char*)end-(char*)argv[i]),err);
-          }
-          errcnt++;
-        }
-        break;
-      case OPT_INT:
-      case OPT_FINT:
-        lv = strtol(cp,&end,0);
-        if( *end ){
-          if( err ){
-            fprintf(err,"%sillegal character in integer argument.\n",emsg);
-            errline(i,(int)((char*)end-(char*)argv[i]),err);
-          }
-          errcnt++;
-        }
-        break;
-      case OPT_STR:
-      case OPT_FSTR:
-        sv = cp;
-        break;
-    }
-    switch( op[j].type ){
-      case OPT_FLAG:
-      case OPT_FFLAG:
-        break;
-      case OPT_DBL:
-        *(double*)(op[j].arg) = dv;
-        break;
-      case OPT_FDBL:
-        (*(void(*)(double))(op[j].arg))(dv);
-        break;
-      case OPT_INT:
-        *(int*)(op[j].arg) = lv;
-        break;
-      case OPT_FINT:
-        (*(void(*)(int))(op[j].arg))((int)lv);
-        break;
-      case OPT_STR:
-        *(char**)(op[j].arg) = sv;
-        break;
-      case OPT_FSTR:
-        (*(void(*)(char *))(op[j].arg))(sv);
-        break;
-    }
-  }
-  return errcnt;
-}
-
-int OptInit(char **a, struct s_options *o, FILE *err)
-{
-  int errcnt = 0;
-  argv = a;
-  op = o;
-  errstream = err;
-  if( argv && *argv && op ){
-    int i;
-    for(i=1; argv[i]; i++){
-      if( argv[i][0]=='+' || argv[i][0]=='-' ){
-        errcnt += handleflags(i,err);
-      }else if( strchr(argv[i],'=') ){
-        errcnt += handleswitch(i,err);
-      }
-    }
-  }
-  if( errcnt>0 ){
-    fprintf(err,"Valid command line options for \"%s\" are:\n",*a);
-    OptPrint();
-    exit(1);
-  }
-  return 0;
-}
-
-int OptNArgs(void){
-  int cnt = 0;
-  int dashdash = 0;
-  int i;
-  if( argv!=0 && argv[0]!=0 ){
-    for(i=1; argv[i]; i++){
-      if( dashdash || !ISOPT(argv[i]) ) cnt++;
-      if( strcmp(argv[i],"--")==0 ) dashdash = 1;
-    }
-  }
-  return cnt;
-}
-
-char *OptArg(int n)
-{
-  int i;
-  i = argindex(n);
-  return i>=0 ? argv[i] : 0;
-}
-
-void OptErr(int n)
-{
-  int i;
-  i = argindex(n);
-  if( i>=0 ) errline(i,0,errstream);
-}
-
-void OptPrint(void){
-  int i;
-  int max, len;
-  max = 0;
-  for(i=0; op[i].label; i++){
-    len = lemonStrlen(op[i].label) + 1;
-    switch( op[i].type ){
-      case OPT_FLAG:
-      case OPT_FFLAG:
-        break;
-      case OPT_INT:
-      case OPT_FINT:
-        len += 9;       /* length of "<integer>" */
-        break;
-      case OPT_DBL:
-      case OPT_FDBL:
-        len += 6;       /* length of "<real>" */
-        break;
-      case OPT_STR:
-      case OPT_FSTR:
-        len += 8;       /* length of "<string>" */
-        break;
-    }
-    if( len>max ) max = len;
-  }
-  for(i=0; op[i].label; i++){
-    switch( op[i].type ){
-      case OPT_FLAG:
-      case OPT_FFLAG:
-        fprintf(errstream,"  -%-*s  %s\n",max,op[i].label,op[i].message);
-        break;
-      case OPT_INT:
-      case OPT_FINT:
-        fprintf(errstream,"  -%s<integer>%*s  %s\n",op[i].label,
-          (int)(max-lemonStrlen(op[i].label)-9),"",op[i].message);
-        break;
-      case OPT_DBL:
-      case OPT_FDBL:
-        fprintf(errstream,"  -%s<real>%*s  %s\n",op[i].label,
-          (int)(max-lemonStrlen(op[i].label)-6),"",op[i].message);
-        break;
-      case OPT_STR:
-      case OPT_FSTR:
-        fprintf(errstream,"  -%s<string>%*s  %s\n",op[i].label,
-          (int)(max-lemonStrlen(op[i].label)-8),"",op[i].message);
-        break;
-    }
-  }
-}
-/*********************** From the file "parse.c" ****************************/
-/*
-** Input file parser for the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-
-/* The state of the parser */
-enum e_state {
-  INITIALIZE,
-  WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE,
-  WAITING_FOR_DECL_KEYWORD,
-  WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG,
-  WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL,
-  WAITING_FOR_ARROW,
-  IN_RHS,
-  LHS_ALIAS_1,
-  LHS_ALIAS_2,
-  LHS_ALIAS_3,
-  RHS_ALIAS_1,
-  RHS_ALIAS_2,
-  PRECEDENCE_MARK_1,
-  PRECEDENCE_MARK_2,
-  RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR,
-  RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR,
-  WAITING_FOR_DESTRUCTOR_SYMBOL,
-  WAITING_FOR_DATATYPE_SYMBOL,
-  WAITING_FOR_FALLBACK_ID,
-  WAITING_FOR_WILDCARD_ID,
-  WAITING_FOR_CLASS_ID,
-  WAITING_FOR_CLASS_TOKEN,
-  WAITING_FOR_TOKEN_NAME
-};
-struct pstate {
-  char *filename;       /* Name of the input file */
-  int tokenlineno;      /* Linenumber at which current token starts */
-  int errorcnt;         /* Number of errors so far */
-  char *tokenstart;     /* Text of current token */
-  struct lemon *gp;     /* Global state vector */
-  enum e_state state;        /* The state of the parser */
-  struct symbol *fallback;   /* The fallback token */
-  struct symbol *tkclass;    /* Token class symbol */
-  struct symbol *lhs;        /* Left-hand side of current rule */
-  const char *lhsalias;      /* Alias for the LHS */
-  int nrhs;                  /* Number of right-hand side symbols seen */
-  struct symbol *rhs[MAXRHS];  /* RHS symbols */
-  const char *alias[MAXRHS]; /* Aliases for each RHS symbol (or NULL) */
-  struct rule *prevrule;     /* Previous rule parsed */
-  const char *declkeyword;   /* Keyword of a declaration */
-  char **declargslot;        /* Where the declaration argument should be put */
-  int insertLineMacro;       /* Add #line before declaration insert */
-  int *decllinenoslot;       /* Where to write declaration line number */
-  enum e_assoc declassoc;    /* Assign this association to decl arguments */
-  int preccounter;           /* Assign this precedence to decl arguments */
-  struct rule *firstrule;    /* Pointer to first rule in the grammar */
-  struct rule *lastrule;     /* Pointer to the most recently parsed rule */
-};
-
-/* Parse a single token */
-static void parseonetoken(struct pstate *psp)
-{
-  const char *x;
-  x = Strsafe(psp->tokenstart);     /* Save the token permanently */
-#if 0
-  printf("%s:%d: Token=[%s] state=%d\n",psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-    x,psp->state);
-#endif
-  switch( psp->state ){
-    case INITIALIZE:
-      psp->prevrule = 0;
-      psp->preccounter = 0;
-      psp->firstrule = psp->lastrule = 0;
-      psp->gp->nrule = 0;
-      /* Fall thru to next case */
-    case WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE:
-      if( x[0]=='%' ){
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_KEYWORD;
-      }else if( ISLOWER(x[0]) ){
-        psp->lhs = Symbol_new(x);
-        psp->nrhs = 0;
-        psp->lhsalias = 0;
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_ARROW;
-      }else if( x[0]=='{' ){
-        if( psp->prevrule==0 ){
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-"There is no prior rule upon which to attach the code \
-fragment which begins on this line.");
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-        }else if( psp->prevrule->code!=0 ){
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-"Code fragment beginning on this line is not the first \
-to follow the previous rule.");
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-        }else{
-          psp->prevrule->line = psp->tokenlineno;
-          psp->prevrule->code = &x[1];
-          psp->prevrule->noCode = 0;
-        }
-      }else if( x[0]=='[' ){
-        psp->state = PRECEDENCE_MARK_1;
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Token \"%s\" should be either \"%%\" or a nonterminal name.",
-          x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-      }
-      break;
-    case PRECEDENCE_MARK_1:
-      if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "The precedence symbol must be a terminal.");
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-      }else if( psp->prevrule==0 ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "There is no prior rule to assign precedence \"[%s]\".",x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-      }else if( psp->prevrule->precsym!=0 ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-"Precedence mark on this line is not the first \
-to follow the previous rule.");
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-      }else{
-        psp->prevrule->precsym = Symbol_new(x);
-      }
-      psp->state = PRECEDENCE_MARK_2;
-      break;
-    case PRECEDENCE_MARK_2:
-      if( x[0]!=']' ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Missing \"]\" on precedence mark.");
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-      }
-      psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_ARROW:
-      if( x[0]==':' && x[1]==':' && x[2]=='=' ){
-        psp->state = IN_RHS;
-      }else if( x[0]=='(' ){
-        psp->state = LHS_ALIAS_1;
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Expected to see a \":\" following the LHS symbol \"%s\".",
-          psp->lhs->name);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case LHS_ALIAS_1:
-      if( ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
-        psp->lhsalias = x;
-        psp->state = LHS_ALIAS_2;
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "\"%s\" is not a valid alias for the LHS \"%s\"\n",
-          x,psp->lhs->name);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case LHS_ALIAS_2:
-      if( x[0]==')' ){
-        psp->state = LHS_ALIAS_3;
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Missing \")\" following LHS alias name \"%s\".",psp->lhsalias);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case LHS_ALIAS_3:
-      if( x[0]==':' && x[1]==':' && x[2]=='=' ){
-        psp->state = IN_RHS;
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Missing \"->\" following: \"%s(%s)\".",
-           psp->lhs->name,psp->lhsalias);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case IN_RHS:
-      if( x[0]=='.' ){
-        struct rule *rp;
-        rp = (struct rule *)calloc( sizeof(struct rule) +
-             sizeof(struct symbol*)*psp->nrhs + sizeof(char*)*psp->nrhs, 1);
-        if( rp==0 ){
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-            "Can't allocate enough memory for this rule.");
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-          psp->prevrule = 0;
-        }else{
-          int i;
-          rp->ruleline = psp->tokenlineno;
-          rp->rhs = (struct symbol**)&rp[1];
-          rp->rhsalias = (const char**)&(rp->rhs[psp->nrhs]);
-          for(i=0; i<psp->nrhs; i++){
-            rp->rhs[i] = psp->rhs[i];
-            rp->rhsalias[i] = psp->alias[i];
-          }
-          rp->lhs = psp->lhs;
-          rp->lhsalias = psp->lhsalias;
-          rp->nrhs = psp->nrhs;
-          rp->code = 0;
-          rp->noCode = 1;
-          rp->precsym = 0;
-          rp->index = psp->gp->nrule++;
-          rp->nextlhs = rp->lhs->rule;
-          rp->lhs->rule = rp;
-          rp->next = 0;
-          if( psp->firstrule==0 ){
-            psp->firstrule = psp->lastrule = rp;
-          }else{
-            psp->lastrule->next = rp;
-            psp->lastrule = rp;
-          }
-          psp->prevrule = rp;
-        }
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-      }else if( ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
-        if( psp->nrhs>=MAXRHS ){
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-            "Too many symbols on RHS of rule beginning at \"%s\".",
-            x);
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-          psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
-        }else{
-          psp->rhs[psp->nrhs] = Symbol_new(x);
-          psp->alias[psp->nrhs] = 0;
-          psp->nrhs++;
-        }
-      }else if( (x[0]=='|' || x[0]=='/') && psp->nrhs>0 ){
-        struct symbol *msp = psp->rhs[psp->nrhs-1];
-        if( msp->type!=MULTITERMINAL ){
-          struct symbol *origsp = msp;
-          msp = (struct symbol *) calloc(1,sizeof(*msp));
-          memset(msp, 0, sizeof(*msp));
-          msp->type = MULTITERMINAL;
-          msp->nsubsym = 1;
-          msp->subsym = (struct symbol **) calloc(1,sizeof(struct symbol*));
-          msp->subsym[0] = origsp;
-          msp->name = origsp->name;
-          psp->rhs[psp->nrhs-1] = msp;
-        }
-        msp->nsubsym++;
-        msp->subsym = (struct symbol **) realloc(msp->subsym,
-          sizeof(struct symbol*)*msp->nsubsym);
-        msp->subsym[msp->nsubsym-1] = Symbol_new(&x[1]);
-        if( ISLOWER(x[1]) || ISLOWER(msp->subsym[0]->name[0]) ){
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-            "Cannot form a compound containing a non-terminal");
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-        }
-      }else if( x[0]=='(' && psp->nrhs>0 ){
-        psp->state = RHS_ALIAS_1;
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Illegal character on RHS of rule: \"%s\".",x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case RHS_ALIAS_1:
-      if( ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
-        psp->alias[psp->nrhs-1] = x;
-        psp->state = RHS_ALIAS_2;
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "\"%s\" is not a valid alias for the RHS symbol \"%s\"\n",
-          x,psp->rhs[psp->nrhs-1]->name);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case RHS_ALIAS_2:
-      if( x[0]==')' ){
-        psp->state = IN_RHS;
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Missing \")\" following LHS alias name \"%s\".",psp->lhsalias);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_DECL_KEYWORD:
-      if( ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
-        psp->declkeyword = x;
-        psp->declargslot = 0;
-        psp->decllinenoslot = 0;
-        psp->insertLineMacro = 1;
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG;
-        if( strcmp(x,"name")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->name);
-          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"include")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->include);
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"code")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->extracode);
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"token_destructor")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &psp->gp->tokendest;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"default_destructor")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &psp->gp->vardest;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"token_prefix")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &psp->gp->tokenprefix;
-          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"syntax_error")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->error);
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"parse_accept")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->accept);
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"parse_failure")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->failure);
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"stack_overflow")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->overflow);
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"extra_argument")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->arg);
-          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"token_type")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->tokentype);
-          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"default_type")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->vartype);
-          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"stack_size")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->stacksize);
-          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"start_symbol")==0 ){
-          psp->declargslot = &(psp->gp->start);
-          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"left")==0 ){
-          psp->preccounter++;
-          psp->declassoc = LEFT;
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"right")==0 ){
-          psp->preccounter++;
-          psp->declassoc = RIGHT;
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"nonassoc")==0 ){
-          psp->preccounter++;
-          psp->declassoc = NONE;
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"destructor")==0 ){
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DESTRUCTOR_SYMBOL;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"type")==0 ){
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DATATYPE_SYMBOL;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"fallback")==0 ){
-          psp->fallback = 0;
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_FALLBACK_ID;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"token")==0 ){
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_TOKEN_NAME;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"wildcard")==0 ){
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_WILDCARD_ID;
-        }else if( strcmp(x,"token_class")==0 ){
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_CLASS_ID;
-        }else{
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-            "Unknown declaration keyword: \"%%%s\".",x);
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-          psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
-        }
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Illegal declaration keyword: \"%s\".",x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_DESTRUCTOR_SYMBOL:
-      if( !ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Symbol name missing after %%destructor keyword");
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
-      }else{
-        struct symbol *sp = Symbol_new(x);
-        psp->declargslot = &sp->destructor;
-        psp->decllinenoslot = &sp->destLineno;
-        psp->insertLineMacro = 1;
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG;
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_DATATYPE_SYMBOL:
-      if( !ISALPHA(x[0]) ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Symbol name missing after %%type keyword");
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
-      }else{
-        struct symbol *sp = Symbol_find(x);
-        if((sp) && (sp->datatype)){
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-            "Symbol %%type \"%s\" already defined", x);
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-          psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
-        }else{
-          if (!sp){
-            sp = Symbol_new(x);
-          }
-          psp->declargslot = &sp->datatype;
-          psp->insertLineMacro = 0;
-          psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG;
-        }
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_PRECEDENCE_SYMBOL:
-      if( x[0]=='.' ){
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-      }else if( ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
-        struct symbol *sp;
-        sp = Symbol_new(x);
-        if( sp->prec>=0 ){
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-            "Symbol \"%s\" has already be given a precedence.",x);
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-        }else{
-          sp->prec = psp->preccounter;
-          sp->assoc = psp->declassoc;
-        }
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Can't assign a precedence to \"%s\".",x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_DECL_ARG:
-      if( x[0]=='{' || x[0]=='\"' || ISALNUM(x[0]) ){
-        const char *zOld, *zNew;
-        char *zBuf, *z;
-        int nOld, n, nLine = 0, nNew, nBack;
-        int addLineMacro;
-        char zLine[50];
-        zNew = x;
-        if( zNew[0]=='"' || zNew[0]=='{' ) zNew++;
-        nNew = lemonStrlen(zNew);
-        if( *psp->declargslot ){
-          zOld = *psp->declargslot;
-        }else{
-          zOld = "";
-        }
-        nOld = lemonStrlen(zOld);
-        n = nOld + nNew + 20;
-        addLineMacro = !psp->gp->nolinenosflag && psp->insertLineMacro &&
-                        (psp->decllinenoslot==0 || psp->decllinenoslot[0]!=0);
-        if( addLineMacro ){
-          for(z=psp->filename, nBack=0; *z; z++){
-            if( *z=='\\' ) nBack++;
-          }
-          lemon_sprintf(zLine, "#line %d ", psp->tokenlineno);
-          nLine = lemonStrlen(zLine);
-          n += nLine + lemonStrlen(psp->filename) + nBack;
-        }
-        *psp->declargslot = (char *) realloc(*psp->declargslot, n);
-        zBuf = *psp->declargslot + nOld;
-        if( addLineMacro ){
-          if( nOld && zBuf[-1]!='\n' ){
-            *(zBuf++) = '\n';
-          }
-          memcpy(zBuf, zLine, nLine);
-          zBuf += nLine;
-          *(zBuf++) = '"';
-          for(z=psp->filename; *z; z++){
-            if( *z=='\\' ){
-              *(zBuf++) = '\\';
-            }
-            *(zBuf++) = *z;
-          }
-          *(zBuf++) = '"';
-          *(zBuf++) = '\n';
-        }
-        if( psp->decllinenoslot && psp->decllinenoslot[0]==0 ){
-          psp->decllinenoslot[0] = psp->tokenlineno;
-        }
-        memcpy(zBuf, zNew, nNew);
-        zBuf += nNew;
-        *zBuf = 0;
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename,psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Illegal argument to %%%s: %s",psp->declkeyword,x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_FALLBACK_ID:
-      if( x[0]=='.' ){
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-      }else if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
-          "%%fallback argument \"%s\" should be a token", x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-      }else{
-        struct symbol *sp = Symbol_new(x);
-        if( psp->fallback==0 ){
-          psp->fallback = sp;
-        }else if( sp->fallback ){
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
-            "More than one fallback assigned to token %s", x);
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-        }else{
-          sp->fallback = psp->fallback;
-          psp->gp->has_fallback = 1;
-        }
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_TOKEN_NAME:
-      /* Tokens do not have to be declared before use.  But they can be
-      ** in order to control their assigned integer number.  The number for
-      ** each token is assigned when it is first seen.  So by including
-      **
-      **     %token ONE TWO THREE
-      **
-      ** early in the grammar file, that assigns small consecutive values
-      ** to each of the tokens ONE TWO and THREE.
-      */
-      if( x[0]=='.' ){
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-      }else if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
-          "%%token argument \"%s\" should be a token", x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-      }else{
-        (void)Symbol_new(x);
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_WILDCARD_ID:
-      if( x[0]=='.' ){
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-      }else if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
-          "%%wildcard argument \"%s\" should be a token", x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-      }else{
-        struct symbol *sp = Symbol_new(x);
-        if( psp->gp->wildcard==0 ){
-          psp->gp->wildcard = sp;
-        }else{
-          ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
-            "Extra wildcard to token: %s", x);
-          psp->errorcnt++;
-        }
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_CLASS_ID:
-      if( !ISLOWER(x[0]) ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
-          "%%token_class must be followed by an identifier: ", x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
-     }else if( Symbol_find(x) ){
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
-          "Symbol \"%s\" already used", x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
-      }else{
-        psp->tkclass = Symbol_new(x);
-        psp->tkclass->type = MULTITERMINAL;
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_CLASS_TOKEN;
-      }
-      break;
-    case WAITING_FOR_CLASS_TOKEN:
-      if( x[0]=='.' ){
-        psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-      }else if( ISUPPER(x[0]) || ((x[0]=='|' || x[0]=='/') && ISUPPER(x[1])) ){
-        struct symbol *msp = psp->tkclass;
-        msp->nsubsym++;
-        msp->subsym = (struct symbol **) realloc(msp->subsym,
-          sizeof(struct symbol*)*msp->nsubsym);
-        if( !ISUPPER(x[0]) ) x++;
-        msp->subsym[msp->nsubsym-1] = Symbol_new(x);
-      }else{
-        ErrorMsg(psp->filename, psp->tokenlineno,
-          "%%token_class argument \"%s\" should be a token", x);
-        psp->errorcnt++;
-        psp->state = RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR;
-      }
-      break;
-    case RESYNC_AFTER_RULE_ERROR:
-/*      if( x[0]=='.' ) psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-**      break; */
-    case RESYNC_AFTER_DECL_ERROR:
-      if( x[0]=='.' ) psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_OR_RULE;
-      if( x[0]=='%' ) psp->state = WAITING_FOR_DECL_KEYWORD;
-      break;
-  }
-}
-
-/* Run the preprocessor over the input file text.  The global variables
-** azDefine[0] through azDefine[nDefine-1] contains the names of all defined
-** macros.  This routine looks for "%ifdef" and "%ifndef" and "%endif" and
-** comments them out.  Text in between is also commented out as appropriate.
-*/
-static void preprocess_input(char *z){
-  int i, j, k, n;
-  int exclude = 0;
-  int start = 0;
-  int lineno = 1;
-  int start_lineno = 1;
-  for(i=0; z[i]; i++){
-    if( z[i]=='\n' ) lineno++;
-    if( z[i]!='%' || (i>0 && z[i-1]!='\n') ) continue;
-    if( strncmp(&z[i],"%endif",6)==0 && ISSPACE(z[i+6]) ){
-      if( exclude ){
-        exclude--;
-        if( exclude==0 ){
-          for(j=start; j<i; j++) if( z[j]!='\n' ) z[j] = ' ';
-        }
-      }
-      for(j=i; z[j] && z[j]!='\n'; j++) z[j] = ' ';
-    }else if( (strncmp(&z[i],"%ifdef",6)==0 && ISSPACE(z[i+6]))
-          || (strncmp(&z[i],"%ifndef",7)==0 && ISSPACE(z[i+7])) ){
-      if( exclude ){
-        exclude++;
-      }else{
-        for(j=i+7; ISSPACE(z[j]); j++){}
-        for(n=0; z[j+n] && !ISSPACE(z[j+n]); n++){}
-        exclude = 1;
-        for(k=0; k<nDefine; k++){
-          if( strncmp(azDefine[k],&z[j],n)==0 && lemonStrlen(azDefine[k])==n ){
-            exclude = 0;
-            break;
-          }
-        }
-        if( z[i+3]=='n' ) exclude = !exclude;
-        if( exclude ){
-          start = i;
-          start_lineno = lineno;
-        }
-      }
-      for(j=i; z[j] && z[j]!='\n'; j++) z[j] = ' ';
-    }
-  }
-  if( exclude ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"unterminated %%ifdef starting on line %d\n", start_lineno);
-    exit(1);
-  }
-}
-
-/* In spite of its name, this function is really a scanner.  It read
-** in the entire input file (all at once) then tokenizes it.  Each
-** token is passed to the function "parseonetoken" which builds all
-** the appropriate data structures in the global state vector "gp".
-*/
-void Parse(struct lemon *gp)
-{
-  struct pstate ps;
-  FILE *fp;
-  char *filebuf;
-  unsigned int filesize;
-  int lineno;
-  int c;
-  char *cp, *nextcp;
-  int startline = 0;
-
-  memset(&ps, '\0', sizeof(ps));
-  ps.gp = gp;
-  ps.filename = gp->filename;
-  ps.errorcnt = 0;
-  ps.state = INITIALIZE;
-
-  /* Begin by reading the input file */
-  fp = fopen(ps.filename,"rb");
-  if( fp==0 ){
-    ErrorMsg(ps.filename,0,"Can't open this file for reading.");
-    gp->errorcnt++;
-    return;
-  }
-  fseek(fp,0,2);
-  filesize = ftell(fp);
-  rewind(fp);
-  filebuf = (char *)malloc( filesize+1 );
-  if( filesize>100000000 || filebuf==0 ){
-    ErrorMsg(ps.filename,0,"Input file too large.");
-    gp->errorcnt++;
-    fclose(fp);
-    return;
-  }
-  if( fread(filebuf,1,filesize,fp)!=filesize ){
-    ErrorMsg(ps.filename,0,"Can't read in all %d bytes of this file.",
-      filesize);
-    free(filebuf);
-    gp->errorcnt++;
-    fclose(fp);
-    return;
-  }
-  fclose(fp);
-  filebuf[filesize] = 0;
-
-  /* Make an initial pass through the file to handle %ifdef and %ifndef */
-  preprocess_input(filebuf);
-
-  /* Now scan the text of the input file */
-  lineno = 1;
-  for(cp=filebuf; (c= *cp)!=0; ){
-    if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;              /* Keep track of the line number */
-    if( ISSPACE(c) ){ cp++; continue; }  /* Skip all white space */
-    if( c=='/' && cp[1]=='/' ){          /* Skip C++ style comments */
-      cp+=2;
-      while( (c= *cp)!=0 && c!='\n' ) cp++;
-      continue;
-    }
-    if( c=='/' && cp[1]=='*' ){          /* Skip C style comments */
-      cp+=2;
-      while( (c= *cp)!=0 && (c!='/' || cp[-1]!='*') ){
-        if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
-        cp++;
-      }
-      if( c ) cp++;
-      continue;
-    }
-    ps.tokenstart = cp;                /* Mark the beginning of the token */
-    ps.tokenlineno = lineno;           /* Linenumber on which token begins */
-    if( c=='\"' ){                     /* String literals */
-      cp++;
-      while( (c= *cp)!=0 && c!='\"' ){
-        if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
-        cp++;
-      }
-      if( c==0 ){
-        ErrorMsg(ps.filename,startline,
-"String starting on this line is not terminated before the end of the file.");
-        ps.errorcnt++;
-        nextcp = cp;
-      }else{
-        nextcp = cp+1;
-      }
-    }else if( c=='{' ){               /* A block of C code */
-      int level;
-      cp++;
-      for(level=1; (c= *cp)!=0 && (level>1 || c!='}'); cp++){
-        if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
-        else if( c=='{' ) level++;
-        else if( c=='}' ) level--;
-        else if( c=='/' && cp[1]=='*' ){  /* Skip comments */
-          int prevc;
-          cp = &cp[2];
-          prevc = 0;
-          while( (c= *cp)!=0 && (c!='/' || prevc!='*') ){
-            if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
-            prevc = c;
-            cp++;
-          }
-        }else if( c=='/' && cp[1]=='/' ){  /* Skip C++ style comments too */
-          cp = &cp[2];
-          while( (c= *cp)!=0 && c!='\n' ) cp++;
-          if( c ) lineno++;
-        }else if( c=='\'' || c=='\"' ){    /* String a character literals */
-          int startchar, prevc;
-          startchar = c;
-          prevc = 0;
-          for(cp++; (c= *cp)!=0 && (c!=startchar || prevc=='\\'); cp++){
-            if( c=='\n' ) lineno++;
-            if( prevc=='\\' ) prevc = 0;
-            else              prevc = c;
-          }
-        }
-      }
-      if( c==0 ){
-        ErrorMsg(ps.filename,ps.tokenlineno,
-"C code starting on this line is not terminated before the end of the file.");
-        ps.errorcnt++;
-        nextcp = cp;
-      }else{
-        nextcp = cp+1;
-      }
-    }else if( ISALNUM(c) ){          /* Identifiers */
-      while( (c= *cp)!=0 && (ISALNUM(c) || c=='_') ) cp++;
-      nextcp = cp;
-    }else if( c==':' && cp[1]==':' && cp[2]=='=' ){ /* The operator "::=" */
-      cp += 3;
-      nextcp = cp;
-    }else if( (c=='/' || c=='|') && ISALPHA(cp[1]) ){
-      cp += 2;
-      while( (c = *cp)!=0 && (ISALNUM(c) || c=='_') ) cp++;
-      nextcp = cp;
-    }else{                          /* All other (one character) operators */
-      cp++;
-      nextcp = cp;
-    }
-    c = *cp;
-    *cp = 0;                        /* Null terminate the token */
-    parseonetoken(&ps);             /* Parse the token */
-    *cp = (char)c;                  /* Restore the buffer */
-    cp = nextcp;
-  }
-  free(filebuf);                    /* Release the buffer after parsing */
-  gp->rule = ps.firstrule;
-  gp->errorcnt = ps.errorcnt;
-}
-/*************************** From the file "plink.c" *********************/
-/*
-** Routines processing configuration follow-set propagation links
-** in the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-static struct plink *plink_freelist = 0;
-
-/* Allocate a new plink */
-struct plink *Plink_new(void){
-  struct plink *newlink;
-
-  if( plink_freelist==0 ){
-    int i;
-    int amt = 100;
-    plink_freelist = (struct plink *)calloc( amt, sizeof(struct plink) );
-    if( plink_freelist==0 ){
-      fprintf(stderr,
-      "Unable to allocate memory for a new follow-set propagation link.\n");
-      exit(1);
-    }
-    for(i=0; i<amt-1; i++) plink_freelist[i].next = &plink_freelist[i+1];
-    plink_freelist[amt-1].next = 0;
-  }
-  newlink = plink_freelist;
-  plink_freelist = plink_freelist->next;
-  return newlink;
-}
-
-/* Add a plink to a plink list */
-void Plink_add(struct plink **plpp, struct config *cfp)
-{
-  struct plink *newlink;
-  newlink = Plink_new();
-  newlink->next = *plpp;
-  *plpp = newlink;
-  newlink->cfp = cfp;
-}
-
-/* Transfer every plink on the list "from" to the list "to" */
-void Plink_copy(struct plink **to, struct plink *from)
-{
-  struct plink *nextpl;
-  while( from ){
-    nextpl = from->next;
-    from->next = *to;
-    *to = from;
-    from = nextpl;
-  }
-}
-
-/* Delete every plink on the list */
-void Plink_delete(struct plink *plp)
-{
-  struct plink *nextpl;
-
-  while( plp ){
-    nextpl = plp->next;
-    plp->next = plink_freelist;
-    plink_freelist = plp;
-    plp = nextpl;
-  }
-}
-/*********************** From the file "report.c" **************************/
-/*
-** Procedures for generating reports and tables in the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-
-/* Generate a filename with the given suffix.  Space to hold the
-** name comes from malloc() and must be freed by the calling
-** function.
-*/
-PRIVATE char *file_makename(struct lemon *lemp, const char *suffix)
-{
-  char *name;
-  char *cp;
-
-  name = (char*)malloc( lemonStrlen(lemp->filename) + lemonStrlen(suffix) + 5 );
-  if( name==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"Can't allocate space for a filename.\n");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-  lemon_strcpy(name,lemp->filename);
-  cp = strrchr(name,'.');
-  if( cp ) *cp = 0;
-  lemon_strcat(name,suffix);
-  return name;
-}
-
-/* Open a file with a name based on the name of the input file,
-** but with a different (specified) suffix, and return a pointer
-** to the stream */
-PRIVATE FILE *file_open(
-  struct lemon *lemp,
-  const char *suffix,
-  const char *mode
-){
-  FILE *fp;
-
-  if( lemp->outname ) free(lemp->outname);
-  lemp->outname = file_makename(lemp, suffix);
-  fp = fopen(lemp->outname,mode);
-  if( fp==0 && *mode=='w' ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"Can't open file \"%s\".\n",lemp->outname);
-    lemp->errorcnt++;
-    return 0;
-  }
-  return fp;
-}
-
-/* Duplicate the input file without comments and without actions
-** on rules */
-void Reprint(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  struct rule *rp;
-  struct symbol *sp;
-  int i, j, maxlen, len, ncolumns, skip;
-  printf("// Reprint of input file \"%s\".\n// Symbols:\n",lemp->filename);
-  maxlen = 10;
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-    sp = lemp->symbols[i];
-    len = lemonStrlen(sp->name);
-    if( len>maxlen ) maxlen = len;
-  }
-  ncolumns = 76/(maxlen+5);
-  if( ncolumns<1 ) ncolumns = 1;
-  skip = (lemp->nsymbol + ncolumns - 1)/ncolumns;
-  for(i=0; i<skip; i++){
-    printf("//");
-    for(j=i; j<lemp->nsymbol; j+=skip){
-      sp = lemp->symbols[j];
-      assert( sp->index==j );
-      printf(" %3d %-*.*s",j,maxlen,maxlen,sp->name);
-    }
-    printf("\n");
-  }
-  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    printf("%s",rp->lhs->name);
-    /*    if( rp->lhsalias ) printf("(%s)",rp->lhsalias); */
-    printf(" ::=");
-    for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
-      sp = rp->rhs[i];
-      if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
-        printf(" %s", sp->subsym[0]->name);
-        for(j=1; j<sp->nsubsym; j++){
-          printf("|%s", sp->subsym[j]->name);
-        }
-      }else{
-        printf(" %s", sp->name);
-      }
-      /* if( rp->rhsalias[i] ) printf("(%s)",rp->rhsalias[i]); */
-    }
-    printf(".");
-    if( rp->precsym ) printf(" [%s]",rp->precsym->name);
-    /* if( rp->code ) printf("\n    %s",rp->code); */
-    printf("\n");
-  }
-}
-
-/* Print a single rule.
-*/
-void RulePrint(FILE *fp, struct rule *rp, int iCursor){
-  struct symbol *sp;
-  int i, j;
-  fprintf(fp,"%s ::=",rp->lhs->name);
-  for(i=0; i<=rp->nrhs; i++){
-    if( i==iCursor ) fprintf(fp," *");
-    if( i==rp->nrhs ) break;
-    sp = rp->rhs[i];
-    if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
-      fprintf(fp," %s", sp->subsym[0]->name);
-      for(j=1; j<sp->nsubsym; j++){
-        fprintf(fp,"|%s",sp->subsym[j]->name);
-      }
-    }else{
-      fprintf(fp," %s", sp->name);
-    }
-  }
-}
-
-/* Print the rule for a configuration.
-*/
-void ConfigPrint(FILE *fp, struct config *cfp){
-  RulePrint(fp, cfp->rp, cfp->dot);
-}
-
-/* #define TEST */
-#if 0
-/* Print a set */
-PRIVATE void SetPrint(out,set,lemp)
-FILE *out;
-char *set;
-struct lemon *lemp;
-{
-  int i;
-  char *spacer;
-  spacer = "";
-  fprintf(out,"%12s[","");
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nterminal; i++){
-    if( SetFind(set,i) ){
-      fprintf(out,"%s%s",spacer,lemp->symbols[i]->name);
-      spacer = " ";
-    }
-  }
-  fprintf(out,"]\n");
-}
-
-/* Print a plink chain */
-PRIVATE void PlinkPrint(out,plp,tag)
-FILE *out;
-struct plink *plp;
-char *tag;
-{
-  while( plp ){
-    fprintf(out,"%12s%s (state %2d) ","",tag,plp->cfp->stp->statenum);
-    ConfigPrint(out,plp->cfp);
-    fprintf(out,"\n");
-    plp = plp->next;
-  }
-}
-#endif
-
-/* Print an action to the given file descriptor.  Return FALSE if
-** nothing was actually printed.
-*/
-int PrintAction(
-  struct action *ap,          /* The action to print */
-  FILE *fp,                   /* Print the action here */
-  int indent                  /* Indent by this amount */
-){
-  int result = 1;
-  switch( ap->type ){
-    case SHIFT: {
-      struct state *stp = ap->x.stp;
-      fprintf(fp,"%*s shift        %-7d",indent,ap->sp->name,stp->statenum);
-      break;
-    }
-    case REDUCE: {
-      struct rule *rp = ap->x.rp;
-      fprintf(fp,"%*s reduce       %-7d",indent,ap->sp->name,rp->iRule);
-      RulePrint(fp, rp, -1);
-      break;
-    }
-    case SHIFTREDUCE: {
-      struct rule *rp = ap->x.rp;
-      fprintf(fp,"%*s shift-reduce %-7d",indent,ap->sp->name,rp->iRule);
-      RulePrint(fp, rp, -1);
-      break;
-    }
-    case ACCEPT:
-      fprintf(fp,"%*s accept",indent,ap->sp->name);
-      break;
-    case ERROR:
-      fprintf(fp,"%*s error",indent,ap->sp->name);
-      break;
-    case SRCONFLICT:
-    case RRCONFLICT:
-      fprintf(fp,"%*s reduce       %-7d ** Parsing conflict **",
-        indent,ap->sp->name,ap->x.rp->iRule);
-      break;
-    case SSCONFLICT:
-      fprintf(fp,"%*s shift        %-7d ** Parsing conflict **",
-        indent,ap->sp->name,ap->x.stp->statenum);
-      break;
-    case SH_RESOLVED:
-      if( showPrecedenceConflict ){
-        fprintf(fp,"%*s shift        %-7d -- dropped by precedence",
-                indent,ap->sp->name,ap->x.stp->statenum);
-      }else{
-        result = 0;
-      }
-      break;
-    case RD_RESOLVED:
-      if( showPrecedenceConflict ){
-        fprintf(fp,"%*s reduce %-7d -- dropped by precedence",
-                indent,ap->sp->name,ap->x.rp->iRule);
-      }else{
-        result = 0;
-      }
-      break;
-    case NOT_USED:
-      result = 0;
-      break;
-  }
-  if( result && ap->spOpt ){
-    fprintf(fp,"  /* because %s==%s */", ap->sp->name, ap->spOpt->name);
-  }
-  return result;
-}
-
-/* Generate the "*.out" log file */
-void ReportOutput(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  int i;
-  struct state *stp;
-  struct config *cfp;
-  struct action *ap;
-  FILE *fp;
-
-  fp = file_open(lemp,".out","wb");
-  if( fp==0 ) return;
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate; i++){
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    fprintf(fp,"State %d:\n",stp->statenum);
-    if( lemp->basisflag ) cfp=stp->bp;
-    else                  cfp=stp->cfp;
-    while( cfp ){
-      char buf[20];
-      if( cfp->dot==cfp->rp->nrhs ){
-        lemon_sprintf(buf,"(%d)",cfp->rp->iRule);
-        fprintf(fp,"    %5s ",buf);
-      }else{
-        fprintf(fp,"          ");
-      }
-      ConfigPrint(fp,cfp);
-      fprintf(fp,"\n");
-#if 0
-      SetPrint(fp,cfp->fws,lemp);
-      PlinkPrint(fp,cfp->fplp,"To  ");
-      PlinkPrint(fp,cfp->bplp,"From");
-#endif
-      if( lemp->basisflag ) cfp=cfp->bp;
-      else                  cfp=cfp->next;
-    }
-    fprintf(fp,"\n");
-    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-      if( PrintAction(ap,fp,30) ) fprintf(fp,"\n");
-    }
-    fprintf(fp,"\n");
-  }
-  fprintf(fp, "----------------------------------------------------\n");
-  fprintf(fp, "Symbols:\n");
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-    int j;
-    struct symbol *sp;
-
-    sp = lemp->symbols[i];
-    fprintf(fp, "  %3d: %s", i, sp->name);
-    if( sp->type==NONTERMINAL ){
-      fprintf(fp, ":");
-      if( sp->lambda ){
-        fprintf(fp, " <lambda>");
-      }
-      for(j=0; j<lemp->nterminal; j++){
-        if( sp->firstset && SetFind(sp->firstset, j) ){
-          fprintf(fp, " %s", lemp->symbols[j]->name);
-        }
-      }
-    }
-    fprintf(fp, "\n");
-  }
-  fclose(fp);
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Search for the file "name" which is in the same directory as
-** the executable */
-PRIVATE char *pathsearch(char *argv0, char *name, int modemask)
-{
-  const char *pathlist;
-  char *pathbufptr;
-  char *pathbuf;
-  char *path,*cp;
-  char c;
-
-#ifdef __WIN32__
-  cp = strrchr(argv0,'\\');
-#else
-  cp = strrchr(argv0,'/');
-#endif
-  if( cp ){
-    c = *cp;
-    *cp = 0;
-    path = (char *)malloc( lemonStrlen(argv0) + lemonStrlen(name) + 2 );
-    if( path ) lemon_sprintf(path,"%s/%s",argv0,name);
-    *cp = c;
-  }else{
-    pathlist = getenv("PATH");
-    if( pathlist==0 ) pathlist = ".:/bin:/usr/bin";
-    pathbuf = (char *) malloc( lemonStrlen(pathlist) + 1 );
-    path = (char *)malloc( lemonStrlen(pathlist)+lemonStrlen(name)+2 );
-    if( (pathbuf != 0) && (path!=0) ){
-      pathbufptr = pathbuf;
-      lemon_strcpy(pathbuf, pathlist);
-      while( *pathbuf ){
-        cp = strchr(pathbuf,':');
-        if( cp==0 ) cp = &pathbuf[lemonStrlen(pathbuf)];
-        c = *cp;
-        *cp = 0;
-        lemon_sprintf(path,"%s/%s",pathbuf,name);
-        *cp = c;
-        if( c==0 ) pathbuf[0] = 0;
-        else pathbuf = &cp[1];
-        if( access(path,modemask)==0 ) break;
-      }
-      free(pathbufptr);
-    }
-  }
-  return path;
-}
-
-/* Given an action, compute the integer value for that action
-** which is to be put in the action table of the generated machine.
-** Return negative if no action should be generated.
-*/
-PRIVATE int compute_action(struct lemon *lemp, struct action *ap)
-{
-  int act;
-  switch( ap->type ){
-    case SHIFT:  act = ap->x.stp->statenum;                        break;
-    case SHIFTREDUCE: {
-      act = ap->x.rp->iRule + lemp->nstate;
-      /* Since a SHIFT is inherient after a prior REDUCE, convert any
-      ** SHIFTREDUCE action with a nonterminal on the LHS into a simple
-      ** REDUCE action: */
-      if( ap->sp->index>=lemp->nterminal ) act += lemp->nrule;
-      break;
-    }
-    case REDUCE: act = ap->x.rp->iRule + lemp->nstate+lemp->nrule; break;
-    case ERROR:  act = lemp->nstate + lemp->nrule*2;               break;
-    case ACCEPT: act = lemp->nstate + lemp->nrule*2 + 1;           break;
-    default:     act = -1; break;
-  }
-  return act;
-}
-
-#define LINESIZE 1000
-/* The next cluster of routines are for reading the template file
-** and writing the results to the generated parser */
-/* The first function transfers data from "in" to "out" until
-** a line is seen which begins with "%%".  The line number is
-** tracked.
-**
-** if name!=0, then any word that begin with "Parse" is changed to
-** begin with *name instead.
-*/
-PRIVATE void tplt_xfer(char *name, FILE *in, FILE *out, int *lineno)
-{
-  int i, iStart;
-  char line[LINESIZE];
-  while( fgets(line,LINESIZE,in) && (line[0]!='%' || line[1]!='%') ){
-    (*lineno)++;
-    iStart = 0;
-    if( name ){
-      for(i=0; line[i]; i++){
-        if( line[i]=='P' && strncmp(&line[i],"Parse",5)==0
-          && (i==0 || !ISALPHA(line[i-1]))
-        ){
-          if( i>iStart ) fprintf(out,"%.*s",i-iStart,&line[iStart]);
-          fprintf(out,"%s",name);
-          i += 4;
-          iStart = i+1;
-        }
-      }
-    }
-    fprintf(out,"%s",&line[iStart]);
-  }
-}
-
-/* The next function finds the template file and opens it, returning
-** a pointer to the opened file. */
-PRIVATE FILE *tplt_open(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  static char templatename[] = "lempar.c";
-  char buf[1000];
-  FILE *in;
-  char *tpltname;
-  char *cp;
-
-  /* first, see if user specified a template filename on the command line. */
-  if (user_templatename != 0) {
-    if( access(user_templatename,004)==-1 ){
-      fprintf(stderr,"Can't find the parser driver template file \"%s\".\n",
-        user_templatename);
-      lemp->errorcnt++;
-      return 0;
-    }
-    in = fopen(user_templatename,"rb");
-    if( in==0 ){
-      fprintf(stderr,"Can't open the template file \"%s\".\n",
-              user_templatename);
-      lemp->errorcnt++;
-      return 0;
-    }
-    return in;
-  }
-
-  cp = strrchr(lemp->filename,'.');
-  if( cp ){
-    lemon_sprintf(buf,"%.*s.lt",(int)(cp-lemp->filename),lemp->filename);
-  }else{
-    lemon_sprintf(buf,"%s.lt",lemp->filename);
-  }
-  if( access(buf,004)==0 ){
-    tpltname = buf;
-  }else if( access(templatename,004)==0 ){
-    tpltname = templatename;
-  }else{
-    tpltname = pathsearch(lemp->argv0,templatename,0);
-  }
-  if( tpltname==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"Can't find the parser driver template file \"%s\".\n",
-    templatename);
-    lemp->errorcnt++;
-    return 0;
-  }
-  in = fopen(tpltname,"rb");
-  if( in==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"Can't open the template file \"%s\".\n",templatename);
-    lemp->errorcnt++;
-    return 0;
-  }
-  return in;
-}
-
-/* Print a #line directive line to the output file. */
-PRIVATE void tplt_linedir(FILE *out, int lineno, char *filename)
-{
-  fprintf(out,"#line %d \"",lineno);
-  while( *filename ){
-    if( *filename == '\\' ) putc('\\',out);
-    putc(*filename,out);
-    filename++;
-  }
-  fprintf(out,"\"\n");
-}
-
-/* Print a string to the file and keep the linenumber up to date */
-PRIVATE void tplt_print(FILE *out, struct lemon *lemp, char *str, int *lineno)
-{
-  if( str==0 ) return;
-  while( *str ){
-    putc(*str,out);
-    if( *str=='\n' ) (*lineno)++;
-    str++;
-  }
-  if( str[-1]!='\n' ){
-    putc('\n',out);
-    (*lineno)++;
-  }
-  if (!lemp->nolinenosflag) {
-    (*lineno)++; tplt_linedir(out,*lineno,lemp->outname);
-  }
-  return;
-}
-
-/*
-** The following routine emits code for the destructor for the
-** symbol sp
-*/
-void emit_destructor_code(
-  FILE *out,
-  struct symbol *sp,
-  struct lemon *lemp,
-  int *lineno
-){
- char *cp = 0;
-
- if( sp->type==TERMINAL ){
-   cp = lemp->tokendest;
-   if( cp==0 ) return;
-   fprintf(out,"{\n"); (*lineno)++;
- }else if( sp->destructor ){
-   cp = sp->destructor;
-   fprintf(out,"{\n"); (*lineno)++;
-   if( !lemp->nolinenosflag ){
-     (*lineno)++;
-     tplt_linedir(out,sp->destLineno,lemp->filename);
-   }
- }else if( lemp->vardest ){
-   cp = lemp->vardest;
-   if( cp==0 ) return;
-   fprintf(out,"{\n"); (*lineno)++;
- }else{
-   assert( 0 );  /* Cannot happen */
- }
- for(; *cp; cp++){
-   if( *cp=='$' && cp[1]=='$' ){
-     fprintf(out,"(yypminor->yy%d)",sp->dtnum);
-     cp++;
-     continue;
-   }
-   if( *cp=='\n' ) (*lineno)++;
-   fputc(*cp,out);
- }
- fprintf(out,"\n"); (*lineno)++;
- if (!lemp->nolinenosflag) {
-   (*lineno)++; tplt_linedir(out,*lineno,lemp->outname);
- }
- fprintf(out,"}\n"); (*lineno)++;
- return;
-}
-
-/*
-** Return TRUE (non-zero) if the given symbol has a destructor.
-*/
-int has_destructor(struct symbol *sp, struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  int ret;
-  if( sp->type==TERMINAL ){
-    ret = lemp->tokendest!=0;
-  }else{
-    ret = lemp->vardest!=0 || sp->destructor!=0;
-  }
-  return ret;
-}
-
-/*
-** Append text to a dynamically allocated string.  If zText is 0 then
-** reset the string to be empty again.  Always return the complete text
-** of the string (which is overwritten with each call).
-**
-** n bytes of zText are stored.  If n==0 then all of zText up to the first
-** \000 terminator is stored.  zText can contain up to two instances of
-** %d.  The values of p1 and p2 are written into the first and second
-** %d.
-**
-** If n==-1, then the previous character is overwritten.
-*/
-PRIVATE char *append_str(const char *zText, int n, int p1, int p2){
-  static char empty[1] = { 0 };
-  static char *z = 0;
-  static int alloced = 0;
-  static int used = 0;
-  int c;
-  char zInt[40];
-  if( zText==0 ){
-    if( used==0 && z!=0 ) z[0] = 0;
-    used = 0;
-    return z;
-  }
-  if( n<=0 ){
-    if( n<0 ){
-      used += n;
-      assert( used>=0 );
-    }
-    n = lemonStrlen(zText);
-  }
-  if( (int) (n+sizeof(zInt)*2+used) >= alloced ){
-    alloced = n + sizeof(zInt)*2 + used + 200;
-    z = (char *) realloc(z,  alloced);
-  }
-  if( z==0 ) return empty;
-  while( n-- > 0 ){
-    c = *(zText++);
-    if( c=='%' && n>0 && zText[0]=='d' ){
-      lemon_sprintf(zInt, "%d", p1);
-      p1 = p2;
-      lemon_strcpy(&z[used], zInt);
-      used += lemonStrlen(&z[used]);
-      zText++;
-      n--;
-    }else{
-      z[used++] = (char)c;
-    }
-  }
-  z[used] = 0;
-  return z;
-}
-
-/*
-** Write and transform the rp->code string so that symbols are expanded.
-** Populate the rp->codePrefix and rp->codeSuffix strings, as appropriate.
-**
-** Return 1 if the expanded code requires that "yylhsminor" local variable
-** to be defined.
-*/
-PRIVATE int translate_code(struct lemon *lemp, struct rule *rp){
-  char *cp, *xp;
-  int i;
-  int rc = 0;            /* True if yylhsminor is used */
-  int dontUseRhs0 = 0;   /* If true, use of left-most RHS label is illegal */
-  const char *zSkip = 0; /* The zOvwrt comment within rp->code, or NULL */
-  char lhsused = 0;      /* True if the LHS element has been used */
-  char lhsdirect;        /* True if LHS writes directly into stack */
-  char used[MAXRHS];     /* True for each RHS element which is used */
-  char zLhs[50];         /* Convert the LHS symbol into this string */
-  char zOvwrt[900];      /* Comment that to allow LHS to overwrite RHS */
-
-  for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++) used[i] = 0;
-  lhsused = 0;
-
-  if( rp->code==0 ){
-    static char newlinestr[2] = { '\n', '\0' };
-    rp->code = newlinestr;
-    rp->line = rp->ruleline;
-    rp->noCode = 1;
-  }else{
-    rp->noCode = 0;
-  }
-
-
-  if( rp->nrhs==0 ){
-    /* If there are no RHS symbols, then writing directly to the LHS is ok */
-    lhsdirect = 1;
-  }else if( rp->rhsalias[0]==0 ){
-    /* The left-most RHS symbol has no value.  LHS direct is ok.  But
-    ** we have to call the distructor on the RHS symbol first. */
-    lhsdirect = 1;
-    if( has_destructor(rp->rhs[0],lemp) ){
-      append_str(0,0,0,0);
-      append_str("  yy_destructor(yypParser,%d,&yymsp[%d].minor);\n", 0,
-                 rp->rhs[0]->index,1-rp->nrhs);
-      rp->codePrefix = Strsafe(append_str(0,0,0,0));
-      rp->noCode = 0;
-    }
-  }else if( rp->lhsalias==0 ){
-    /* There is no LHS value symbol. */
-    lhsdirect = 1;
-  }else if( strcmp(rp->lhsalias,rp->rhsalias[0])==0 ){
-    /* The LHS symbol and the left-most RHS symbol are the same, so
-    ** direct writing is allowed */
-    lhsdirect = 1;
-    lhsused = 1;
-    used[0] = 1;
-    if( rp->lhs->dtnum!=rp->rhs[0]->dtnum ){
-      ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
-        "%s(%s) and %s(%s) share the same label but have "
-        "different datatypes.",
-        rp->lhs->name, rp->lhsalias, rp->rhs[0]->name, rp->rhsalias[0]);
-      lemp->errorcnt++;
-    }
-  }else{
-    lemon_sprintf(zOvwrt, "/*%s-overwrites-%s*/",
-                  rp->lhsalias, rp->rhsalias[0]);
-    zSkip = strstr(rp->code, zOvwrt);
-    if( zSkip!=0 ){
-      /* The code contains a special comment that indicates that it is safe
-      ** for the LHS label to overwrite left-most RHS label. */
-      lhsdirect = 1;
-    }else{
-      lhsdirect = 0;
-    }
-  }
-  if( lhsdirect ){
-    sprintf(zLhs, "yymsp[%d].minor.yy%d",1-rp->nrhs,rp->lhs->dtnum);
-  }else{
-    rc = 1;
-    sprintf(zLhs, "yylhsminor.yy%d",rp->lhs->dtnum);
-  }
-
-  append_str(0,0,0,0);
-
-  /* This const cast is wrong but harmless, if we're careful. */
-  for(cp=(char *)rp->code; *cp; cp++){
-    if( cp==zSkip ){
-      append_str(zOvwrt,0,0,0);
-      cp += lemonStrlen(zOvwrt)-1;
-      dontUseRhs0 = 1;
-      continue;
-    }
-    if( ISALPHA(*cp) && (cp==rp->code || (!ISALNUM(cp[-1]) && cp[-1]!='_')) ){
-      char saved;
-      for(xp= &cp[1]; ISALNUM(*xp) || *xp=='_'; xp++);
-      saved = *xp;
-      *xp = 0;
-      if( rp->lhsalias && strcmp(cp,rp->lhsalias)==0 ){
-        append_str(zLhs,0,0,0);
-        cp = xp;
-        lhsused = 1;
-      }else{
-        for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
-          if( rp->rhsalias[i] && strcmp(cp,rp->rhsalias[i])==0 ){
-            if( i==0 && dontUseRhs0 ){
-              ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
-                 "Label %s used after '%s'.",
-                 rp->rhsalias[0], zOvwrt);
-              lemp->errorcnt++;
-            }else if( cp!=rp->code && cp[-1]=='@' ){
-              /* If the argument is of the form @X then substituted
-              ** the token number of X, not the value of X */
-              append_str("yymsp[%d].major",-1,i-rp->nrhs+1,0);
-            }else{
-              struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[i];
-              int dtnum;
-              if( sp->type==MULTITERMINAL ){
-                dtnum = sp->subsym[0]->dtnum;
-              }else{
-                dtnum = sp->dtnum;
-              }
-              append_str("yymsp[%d].minor.yy%d",0,i-rp->nrhs+1, dtnum);
-            }
-            cp = xp;
-            used[i] = 1;
-            break;
-          }
-        }
-      }
-      *xp = saved;
-    }
-    append_str(cp, 1, 0, 0);
-  } /* End loop */
-
-  /* Main code generation completed */
-  cp = append_str(0,0,0,0);
-  if( cp && cp[0] ) rp->code = Strsafe(cp);
-  append_str(0,0,0,0);
-
-  /* Check to make sure the LHS has been used */
-  if( rp->lhsalias && !lhsused ){
-    ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
-      "Label \"%s\" for \"%s(%s)\" is never used.",
-        rp->lhsalias,rp->lhs->name,rp->lhsalias);
-    lemp->errorcnt++;
-  }
-
-  /* Generate destructor code for RHS minor values which are not referenced.
-  ** Generate error messages for unused labels and duplicate labels.
-  */
-  for(i=0; i<rp->nrhs; i++){
-    if( rp->rhsalias[i] ){
-      if( i>0 ){
-        int j;
-        if( rp->lhsalias && strcmp(rp->lhsalias,rp->rhsalias[i])==0 ){
-          ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
-            "%s(%s) has the same label as the LHS but is not the left-most "
-            "symbol on the RHS.",
-            rp->rhs[i]->name, rp->rhsalias);
-          lemp->errorcnt++;
-        }
-        for(j=0; j<i; j++){
-          if( rp->rhsalias[j] && strcmp(rp->rhsalias[j],rp->rhsalias[i])==0 ){
-            ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
-              "Label %s used for multiple symbols on the RHS of a rule.",
-              rp->rhsalias[i]);
-            lemp->errorcnt++;
-            break;
-          }
-        }
-      }
-      if( !used[i] ){
-        ErrorMsg(lemp->filename,rp->ruleline,
-          "Label %s for \"%s(%s)\" is never used.",
-          rp->rhsalias[i],rp->rhs[i]->name,rp->rhsalias[i]);
-        lemp->errorcnt++;
-      }
-    }else if( i>0 && has_destructor(rp->rhs[i],lemp) ){
-      append_str("  yy_destructor(yypParser,%d,&yymsp[%d].minor);\n", 0,
-         rp->rhs[i]->index,i-rp->nrhs+1);
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* If unable to write LHS values directly into the stack, write the
-  ** saved LHS value now. */
-  if( lhsdirect==0 ){
-    append_str("  yymsp[%d].minor.yy%d = ", 0, 1-rp->nrhs, rp->lhs->dtnum);
-    append_str(zLhs, 0, 0, 0);
-    append_str(";\n", 0, 0, 0);
-  }
-
-  /* Suffix code generation complete */
-  cp = append_str(0,0,0,0);
-  if( cp && cp[0] ){
-    rp->codeSuffix = Strsafe(cp);
-    rp->noCode = 0;
-  }
-
-  return rc;
-}
-
-/*
-** Generate code which executes when the rule "rp" is reduced.  Write
-** the code to "out".  Make sure lineno stays up-to-date.
-*/
-PRIVATE void emit_code(
-  FILE *out,
-  struct rule *rp,
-  struct lemon *lemp,
-  int *lineno
-){
- const char *cp;
-
- /* Setup code prior to the #line directive */
- if( rp->codePrefix && rp->codePrefix[0] ){
-   fprintf(out, "{%s", rp->codePrefix);
-   for(cp=rp->codePrefix; *cp; cp++){ if( *cp=='\n' ) (*lineno)++; }
- }
-
- /* Generate code to do the reduce action */
- if( rp->code ){
-   if( !lemp->nolinenosflag ){
-     (*lineno)++;
-     tplt_linedir(out,rp->line,lemp->filename);
-   }
-   fprintf(out,"{%s",rp->code);
-   for(cp=rp->code; *cp; cp++){ if( *cp=='\n' ) (*lineno)++; }
-   fprintf(out,"}\n"); (*lineno)++;
-   if( !lemp->nolinenosflag ){
-     (*lineno)++;
-     tplt_linedir(out,*lineno,lemp->outname);
-   }
- }
-
- /* Generate breakdown code that occurs after the #line directive */
- if( rp->codeSuffix && rp->codeSuffix[0] ){
-   fprintf(out, "%s", rp->codeSuffix);
-   for(cp=rp->codeSuffix; *cp; cp++){ if( *cp=='\n' ) (*lineno)++; }
- }
-
- if( rp->codePrefix ){
-   fprintf(out, "}\n"); (*lineno)++;
- }
-
- return;
-}
-
-/*
-** Print the definition of the union used for the parser's data stack.
-** This union contains fields for every possible data type for tokens
-** and nonterminals.  In the process of computing and printing this
-** union, also set the ".dtnum" field of every terminal and nonterminal
-** symbol.
-*/
-void print_stack_union(
-  FILE *out,                  /* The output stream */
-  struct lemon *lemp,         /* The main info structure for this parser */
-  int *plineno,               /* Pointer to the line number */
-  int mhflag                  /* True if generating makeheaders output */
-){
-  int lineno = *plineno;    /* The line number of the output */
-  char **types;             /* A hash table of datatypes */
-  int arraysize;            /* Size of the "types" array */
-  int maxdtlength;          /* Maximum length of any ".datatype" field. */
-  char *stddt;              /* Standardized name for a datatype */
-  int i,j;                  /* Loop counters */
-  unsigned hash;            /* For hashing the name of a type */
-  const char *name;         /* Name of the parser */
-
-  /* Allocate and initialize types[] and allocate stddt[] */
-  arraysize = lemp->nsymbol * 2;
-  types = (char**)calloc( arraysize, sizeof(char*) );
-  if( types==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"Out of memory.\n");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-  for(i=0; i<arraysize; i++) types[i] = 0;
-  maxdtlength = 0;
-  if( lemp->vartype ){
-    maxdtlength = lemonStrlen(lemp->vartype);
-  }
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-    int len;
-    struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
-    if( sp->datatype==0 ) continue;
-    len = lemonStrlen(sp->datatype);
-    if( len>maxdtlength ) maxdtlength = len;
-  }
-  stddt = (char*)malloc( maxdtlength*2 + 1 );
-  if( stddt==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"Out of memory.\n");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-
-  /* Build a hash table of datatypes. The ".dtnum" field of each symbol
-  ** is filled in with the hash index plus 1.  A ".dtnum" value of 0 is
-  ** used for terminal symbols.  If there is no %default_type defined then
-  ** 0 is also used as the .dtnum value for nonterminals which do not specify
-  ** a datatype using the %type directive.
-  */
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-    struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
-    char *cp;
-    if( sp==lemp->errsym ){
-      sp->dtnum = arraysize+1;
-      continue;
-    }
-    if( sp->type!=NONTERMINAL || (sp->datatype==0 && lemp->vartype==0) ){
-      sp->dtnum = 0;
-      continue;
-    }
-    cp = sp->datatype;
-    if( cp==0 ) cp = lemp->vartype;
-    j = 0;
-    while( ISSPACE(*cp) ) cp++;
-    while( *cp ) stddt[j++] = *cp++;
-    while( j>0 && ISSPACE(stddt[j-1]) ) j--;
-    stddt[j] = 0;
-    if( lemp->tokentype && strcmp(stddt, lemp->tokentype)==0 ){
-      sp->dtnum = 0;
-      continue;
-    }
-    hash = 0;
-    for(j=0; stddt[j]; j++){
-      hash = hash*53 + stddt[j];
-    }
-    hash = (hash & 0x7fffffff)%arraysize;
-    while( types[hash] ){
-      if( strcmp(types[hash],stddt)==0 ){
-        sp->dtnum = hash + 1;
-        break;
-      }
-      hash++;
-      if( hash>=(unsigned)arraysize ) hash = 0;
-    }
-    if( types[hash]==0 ){
-      sp->dtnum = hash + 1;
-      types[hash] = (char*)malloc( lemonStrlen(stddt)+1 );
-      if( types[hash]==0 ){
-        fprintf(stderr,"Out of memory.\n");
-        exit(1);
-      }
-      lemon_strcpy(types[hash],stddt);
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Print out the definition of YYTOKENTYPE and YYMINORTYPE */
-  name = lemp->name ? lemp->name : "Parse";
-  lineno = *plineno;
-  if( mhflag ){ fprintf(out,"#if INTERFACE\n"); lineno++; }
-  fprintf(out,"#define %sTOKENTYPE %s\n",name,
-    lemp->tokentype?lemp->tokentype:"void*");  lineno++;
-  if( mhflag ){ fprintf(out,"#endif\n"); lineno++; }
-  fprintf(out,"typedef union {\n"); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"  int yyinit;\n"); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"  %sTOKENTYPE yy0;\n",name); lineno++;
-  for(i=0; i<arraysize; i++){
-    if( types[i]==0 ) continue;
-    fprintf(out,"  %s yy%d;\n",types[i],i+1); lineno++;
-    free(types[i]);
-  }
-  if( lemp->errsym->useCnt ){
-    fprintf(out,"  int yy%d;\n",lemp->errsym->dtnum); lineno++;
-  }
-  free(stddt);
-  free(types);
-  fprintf(out,"} YYMINORTYPE;\n"); lineno++;
-  *plineno = lineno;
-}
-
-/*
-** Return the name of a C datatype able to represent values between
-** lwr and upr, inclusive.  If pnByte!=NULL then also write the sizeof
-** for that type (1, 2, or 4) into *pnByte.
-*/
-static const char *minimum_size_type(int lwr, int upr, int *pnByte){
-  const char *zType = "int";
-  int nByte = 4;
-  if( lwr>=0 ){
-    if( upr<=255 ){
-      zType = "unsigned char";
-      nByte = 1;
-    }else if( upr<65535 ){
-      zType = "unsigned short int";
-      nByte = 2;
-    }else{
-      zType = "unsigned int";
-      nByte = 4;
-    }
-  }else if( lwr>=-127 && upr<=127 ){
-    zType = "signed char";
-    nByte = 1;
-  }else if( lwr>=-32767 && upr<32767 ){
-    zType = "short";
-    nByte = 2;
-  }
-  if( pnByte ) *pnByte = nByte;
-  return zType;
-}
-
-/*
-** Each state contains a set of token transaction and a set of
-** nonterminal transactions.  Each of these sets makes an instance
-** of the following structure.  An array of these structures is used
-** to order the creation of entries in the yy_action[] table.
-*/
-struct axset {
-  struct state *stp;   /* A pointer to a state */
-  int isTkn;           /* True to use tokens.  False for non-terminals */
-  int nAction;         /* Number of actions */
-  int iOrder;          /* Original order of action sets */
-};
-
-/*
-** Compare to axset structures for sorting purposes
-*/
-static int axset_compare(const void *a, const void *b){
-  struct axset *p1 = (struct axset*)a;
-  struct axset *p2 = (struct axset*)b;
-  int c;
-  c = p2->nAction - p1->nAction;
-  if( c==0 ){
-    c = p1->iOrder - p2->iOrder;
-  }
-  assert( c!=0 || p1==p2 );
-  return c;
-}
-
-/*
-** Write text on "out" that describes the rule "rp".
-*/
-static void writeRuleText(FILE *out, struct rule *rp){
-  int j;
-  fprintf(out,"%s ::=", rp->lhs->name);
-  for(j=0; j<rp->nrhs; j++){
-    struct symbol *sp = rp->rhs[j];
-    if( sp->type!=MULTITERMINAL ){
-      fprintf(out," %s", sp->name);
-    }else{
-      int k;
-      fprintf(out," %s", sp->subsym[0]->name);
-      for(k=1; k<sp->nsubsym; k++){
-        fprintf(out,"|%s",sp->subsym[k]->name);
-      }
-    }
-  }
-}
-
-
-/* Generate C source code for the parser */
-void ReportTable(
-  struct lemon *lemp,
-  int mhflag     /* Output in makeheaders format if true */
-){
-  FILE *out, *in;
-  char line[LINESIZE];
-  int  lineno;
-  struct state *stp;
-  struct action *ap;
-  struct rule *rp;
-  struct acttab *pActtab;
-  int i, j, n, sz;
-  int szActionType;     /* sizeof(YYACTIONTYPE) */
-  int szCodeType;       /* sizeof(YYCODETYPE)   */
-  const char *name;
-  int mnTknOfst, mxTknOfst;
-  int mnNtOfst, mxNtOfst;
-  struct axset *ax;
-
-  in = tplt_open(lemp);
-  if( in==0 ) return;
-  out = file_open(lemp,".c","wb");
-  if( out==0 ){
-    fclose(in);
-    return;
-  }
-  lineno = 1;
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate the include code, if any */
-  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->include,&lineno);
-  if( mhflag ){
-    char *incName = file_makename(lemp, ".h");
-    fprintf(out,"#include \"%s\"\n", incName); lineno++;
-    free(incName);
-  }
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate #defines for all tokens */
-  if( mhflag ){
-    const char *prefix;
-    fprintf(out,"#if INTERFACE\n"); lineno++;
-    if( lemp->tokenprefix ) prefix = lemp->tokenprefix;
-    else                    prefix = "";
-    for(i=1; i<lemp->nterminal; i++){
-      fprintf(out,"#define %s%-30s %2d\n",prefix,lemp->symbols[i]->name,i);
-      lineno++;
-    }
-    fprintf(out,"#endif\n"); lineno++;
-  }
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate the defines */
-  fprintf(out,"#define YYCODETYPE %s\n",
-    minimum_size_type(0, lemp->nsymbol+1, &szCodeType)); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YYNOCODE %d\n",lemp->nsymbol+1);  lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YYACTIONTYPE %s\n",
-    minimum_size_type(0,lemp->nstate+lemp->nrule*2+5,&szActionType)); lineno++;
-  if( lemp->wildcard ){
-    fprintf(out,"#define YYWILDCARD %d\n",
-       lemp->wildcard->index); lineno++;
-  }
-  print_stack_union(out,lemp,&lineno,mhflag);
-  fprintf(out, "#ifndef YYSTACKDEPTH\n"); lineno++;
-  if( lemp->stacksize ){
-    fprintf(out,"#define YYSTACKDEPTH %s\n",lemp->stacksize);  lineno++;
-  }else{
-    fprintf(out,"#define YYSTACKDEPTH 100\n");  lineno++;
-  }
-  fprintf(out, "#endif\n"); lineno++;
-  if( mhflag ){
-    fprintf(out,"#if INTERFACE\n"); lineno++;
-  }
-  name = lemp->name ? lemp->name : "Parse";
-  if( lemp->arg && lemp->arg[0] ){
-    i = lemonStrlen(lemp->arg);
-    while( i>=1 && ISSPACE(lemp->arg[i-1]) ) i--;
-    while( i>=1 && (ISALNUM(lemp->arg[i-1]) || lemp->arg[i-1]=='_') ) i--;
-    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_SDECL %s;\n",name,lemp->arg);  lineno++;
-    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_PDECL ,%s\n",name,lemp->arg);  lineno++;
-    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_FETCH %s = yypParser->%s\n",
-                 name,lemp->arg,&lemp->arg[i]);  lineno++;
-    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_STORE yypParser->%s = %s\n",
-                 name,&lemp->arg[i],&lemp->arg[i]);  lineno++;
-  }else{
-    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_SDECL\n",name);  lineno++;
-    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_PDECL\n",name);  lineno++;
-    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_FETCH\n",name); lineno++;
-    fprintf(out,"#define %sARG_STORE\n",name); lineno++;
-  }
-  if( mhflag ){
-    fprintf(out,"#endif\n"); lineno++;
-  }
-  if( lemp->errsym->useCnt ){
-    fprintf(out,"#define YYERRORSYMBOL %d\n",lemp->errsym->index); lineno++;
-    fprintf(out,"#define YYERRSYMDT yy%d\n",lemp->errsym->dtnum); lineno++;
-  }
-  if( lemp->has_fallback ){
-    fprintf(out,"#define YYFALLBACK 1\n");  lineno++;
-  }
-
-  /* Compute the action table, but do not output it yet.  The action
-  ** table must be computed before generating the YYNSTATE macro because
-  ** we need to know how many states can be eliminated.
-  */
-  ax = (struct axset *) calloc(lemp->nxstate*2, sizeof(ax[0]));
-  if( ax==0 ){
-    fprintf(stderr,"malloc failed\n");
-    exit(1);
-  }
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate; i++){
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    ax[i*2].stp = stp;
-    ax[i*2].isTkn = 1;
-    ax[i*2].nAction = stp->nTknAct;
-    ax[i*2+1].stp = stp;
-    ax[i*2+1].isTkn = 0;
-    ax[i*2+1].nAction = stp->nNtAct;
-  }
-  mxTknOfst = mnTknOfst = 0;
-  mxNtOfst = mnNtOfst = 0;
-  /* In an effort to minimize the action table size, use the heuristic
-  ** of placing the largest action sets first */
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate*2; i++) ax[i].iOrder = i;
-  qsort(ax, lemp->nxstate*2, sizeof(ax[0]), axset_compare);
-  pActtab = acttab_alloc();
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate*2 && ax[i].nAction>0; i++){
-    stp = ax[i].stp;
-    if( ax[i].isTkn ){
-      for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-        int action;
-        if( ap->sp->index>=lemp->nterminal ) continue;
-        action = compute_action(lemp, ap);
-        if( action<0 ) continue;
-        acttab_action(pActtab, ap->sp->index, action);
-      }
-      stp->iTknOfst = acttab_insert(pActtab);
-      if( stp->iTknOfst<mnTknOfst ) mnTknOfst = stp->iTknOfst;
-      if( stp->iTknOfst>mxTknOfst ) mxTknOfst = stp->iTknOfst;
-    }else{
-      for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-        int action;
-        if( ap->sp->index<lemp->nterminal ) continue;
-        if( ap->sp->index==lemp->nsymbol ) continue;
-        action = compute_action(lemp, ap);
-        if( action<0 ) continue;
-        acttab_action(pActtab, ap->sp->index, action);
-      }
-      stp->iNtOfst = acttab_insert(pActtab);
-      if( stp->iNtOfst<mnNtOfst ) mnNtOfst = stp->iNtOfst;
-      if( stp->iNtOfst>mxNtOfst ) mxNtOfst = stp->iNtOfst;
-    }
-#if 0  /* Uncomment for a trace of how the yy_action[] table fills out */
-    { int jj, nn;
-      for(jj=nn=0; jj<pActtab->nAction; jj++){
-        if( pActtab->aAction[jj].action<0 ) nn++;
-      }
-      printf("%4d: State %3d %s n: %2d size: %5d freespace: %d\n",
-             i, stp->statenum, ax[i].isTkn ? "Token" : "Var  ",
-             ax[i].nAction, pActtab->nAction, nn);
-    }
-#endif
-  }
-  free(ax);
-
-  /* Mark rules that are actually used for reduce actions after all
-  ** optimizations have been applied
-  */
-  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next) rp->doesReduce = LEMON_FALSE;
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nxstate; i++){
-    for(ap=lemp->sorted[i]->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-      if( ap->type==REDUCE || ap->type==SHIFTREDUCE ){
-        ap->x.rp->doesReduce = 1;
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Finish rendering the constants now that the action table has
-  ** been computed */
-  fprintf(out,"#define YYNSTATE             %d\n",lemp->nxstate);  lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YYNRULE              %d\n",lemp->nrule);  lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MAX_SHIFT         %d\n",lemp->nxstate-1); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE   %d\n",lemp->nstate); lineno++;
-  i = lemp->nstate + lemp->nrule;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE   %d\n", i-1); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MIN_REDUCE        %d\n", i); lineno++;
-  i = lemp->nstate + lemp->nrule*2;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YY_MAX_REDUCE        %d\n", i-1); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YY_ERROR_ACTION      %d\n", i); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YY_ACCEPT_ACTION     %d\n", i+1); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YY_NO_ACTION         %d\n", i+2); lineno++;
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Now output the action table and its associates:
-  **
-  **  yy_action[]        A single table containing all actions.
-  **  yy_lookahead[]     A table containing the lookahead for each entry in
-  **                     yy_action.  Used to detect hash collisions.
-  **  yy_shift_ofst[]    For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-  **                     shifting terminals.
-  **  yy_reduce_ofst[]   For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-  **                     shifting non-terminals after a reduce.
-  **  yy_default[]       Default action for each state.
-  */
-
-  /* Output the yy_action table */
-  lemp->nactiontab = n = acttab_size(pActtab);
-  lemp->tablesize += n*szActionType;
-  fprintf(out,"#define YY_ACTTAB_COUNT (%d)\n", n); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out,"static const YYACTIONTYPE yy_action[] = {\n"); lineno++;
-  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
-    int action = acttab_yyaction(pActtab, i);
-    if( action<0 ) action = lemp->nstate + lemp->nrule + 2;
-    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
-    fprintf(out, " %4d,", action);
-    if( j==9 || i==n-1 ){
-      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
-      j = 0;
-    }else{
-      j++;
-    }
-  }
-  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
-
-  /* Output the yy_lookahead table */
-  lemp->tablesize += n*szCodeType;
-  fprintf(out,"static const YYCODETYPE yy_lookahead[] = {\n"); lineno++;
-  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
-    int la = acttab_yylookahead(pActtab, i);
-    if( la<0 ) la = lemp->nsymbol;
-    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
-    fprintf(out, " %4d,", la);
-    if( j==9 || i==n-1 ){
-      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
-      j = 0;
-    }else{
-      j++;
-    }
-  }
-  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
-
-  /* Output the yy_shift_ofst[] table */
-  n = lemp->nxstate;
-  while( n>0 && lemp->sorted[n-1]->iTknOfst==NO_OFFSET ) n--;
-  fprintf(out, "#define YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT (%d)\n", lemp->nactiontab); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out, "#define YY_SHIFT_COUNT    (%d)\n", n-1); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out, "#define YY_SHIFT_MIN      (%d)\n", mnTknOfst); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out, "#define YY_SHIFT_MAX      (%d)\n", mxTknOfst); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out, "static const %s yy_shift_ofst[] = {\n",
-       minimum_size_type(mnTknOfst, lemp->nterminal+lemp->nactiontab, &sz));
-       lineno++;
-  lemp->tablesize += n*sz;
-  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
-    int ofst;
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    ofst = stp->iTknOfst;
-    if( ofst==NO_OFFSET ) ofst = lemp->nactiontab;
-    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
-    fprintf(out, " %4d,", ofst);
-    if( j==9 || i==n-1 ){
-      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
-      j = 0;
-    }else{
-      j++;
-    }
-  }
-  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
-
-  /* Output the yy_reduce_ofst[] table */
-  fprintf(out, "#define YY_REDUCE_USE_DFLT (%d)\n", mnNtOfst-1); lineno++;
-  n = lemp->nxstate;
-  while( n>0 && lemp->sorted[n-1]->iNtOfst==NO_OFFSET ) n--;
-  fprintf(out, "#define YY_REDUCE_COUNT (%d)\n", n-1); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out, "#define YY_REDUCE_MIN   (%d)\n", mnNtOfst); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out, "#define YY_REDUCE_MAX   (%d)\n", mxNtOfst); lineno++;
-  fprintf(out, "static const %s yy_reduce_ofst[] = {\n",
-          minimum_size_type(mnNtOfst-1, mxNtOfst, &sz)); lineno++;
-  lemp->tablesize += n*sz;
-  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
-    int ofst;
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    ofst = stp->iNtOfst;
-    if( ofst==NO_OFFSET ) ofst = mnNtOfst - 1;
-    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
-    fprintf(out, " %4d,", ofst);
-    if( j==9 || i==n-1 ){
-      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
-      j = 0;
-    }else{
-      j++;
-    }
-  }
-  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
-
-  /* Output the default action table */
-  fprintf(out, "static const YYACTIONTYPE yy_default[] = {\n"); lineno++;
-  n = lemp->nxstate;
-  lemp->tablesize += n*szActionType;
-  for(i=j=0; i<n; i++){
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    if( j==0 ) fprintf(out," /* %5d */ ", i);
-    fprintf(out, " %4d,", stp->iDfltReduce+lemp->nstate+lemp->nrule);
-    if( j==9 || i==n-1 ){
-      fprintf(out, "\n"); lineno++;
-      j = 0;
-    }else{
-      j++;
-    }
-  }
-  fprintf(out, "};\n"); lineno++;
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate the table of fallback tokens.
-  */
-  if( lemp->has_fallback ){
-    int mx = lemp->nterminal - 1;
-    while( mx>0 && lemp->symbols[mx]->fallback==0 ){ mx--; }
-    lemp->tablesize += (mx+1)*szCodeType;
-    for(i=0; i<=mx; i++){
-      struct symbol *p = lemp->symbols[i];
-      if( p->fallback==0 ){
-        fprintf(out, "    0,  /* %10s => nothing */\n", p->name);
-      }else{
-        fprintf(out, "  %3d,  /* %10s => %s */\n", p->fallback->index,
-          p->name, p->fallback->name);
-      }
-      lineno++;
-    }
-  }
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name, in, out, &lineno);
-
-  /* Generate a table containing the symbolic name of every symbol
-  */
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-    lemon_sprintf(line,"\"%s\",",lemp->symbols[i]->name);
-    fprintf(out,"  %-15s",line);
-    if( (i&3)==3 ){ fprintf(out,"\n"); lineno++; }
-  }
-  if( (i&3)!=0 ){ fprintf(out,"\n"); lineno++; }
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate a table containing a text string that describes every
-  ** rule in the rule set of the grammar.  This information is used
-  ** when tracing REDUCE actions.
-  */
-  for(i=0, rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next, i++){
-    assert( rp->iRule==i );
-    fprintf(out," /* %3d */ \"", i);
-    writeRuleText(out, rp);
-    fprintf(out,"\",\n"); lineno++;
-  }
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate code which executes every time a symbol is popped from
-  ** the stack while processing errors or while destroying the parser.
-  ** (In other words, generate the %destructor actions)
-  */
-  if( lemp->tokendest ){
-    int once = 1;
-    for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-      struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
-      if( sp==0 || sp->type!=TERMINAL ) continue;
-      if( once ){
-        fprintf(out, "      /* TERMINAL Destructor */\n"); lineno++;
-        once = 0;
-      }
-      fprintf(out,"    case %d: /* %s */\n", sp->index, sp->name); lineno++;
-    }
-    for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol && lemp->symbols[i]->type!=TERMINAL; i++);
-    if( i<lemp->nsymbol ){
-      emit_destructor_code(out,lemp->symbols[i],lemp,&lineno);
-      fprintf(out,"      break;\n"); lineno++;
-    }
-  }
-  if( lemp->vardest ){
-    struct symbol *dflt_sp = 0;
-    int once = 1;
-    for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-      struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
-      if( sp==0 || sp->type==TERMINAL ||
-          sp->index<=0 || sp->destructor!=0 ) continue;
-      if( once ){
-        fprintf(out, "      /* Default NON-TERMINAL Destructor */\n"); lineno++;
-        once = 0;
-      }
-      fprintf(out,"    case %d: /* %s */\n", sp->index, sp->name); lineno++;
-      dflt_sp = sp;
-    }
-    if( dflt_sp!=0 ){
-      emit_destructor_code(out,dflt_sp,lemp,&lineno);
-    }
-    fprintf(out,"      break;\n"); lineno++;
-  }
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nsymbol; i++){
-    struct symbol *sp = lemp->symbols[i];
-    if( sp==0 || sp->type==TERMINAL || sp->destructor==0 ) continue;
-    if( sp->destLineno<0 ) continue;  /* Already emitted */
-    fprintf(out,"    case %d: /* %s */\n", sp->index, sp->name); lineno++;
-
-    /* Combine duplicate destructors into a single case */
-    for(j=i+1; j<lemp->nsymbol; j++){
-      struct symbol *sp2 = lemp->symbols[j];
-      if( sp2 && sp2->type!=TERMINAL && sp2->destructor
-          && sp2->dtnum==sp->dtnum
-          && strcmp(sp->destructor,sp2->destructor)==0 ){
-         fprintf(out,"    case %d: /* %s */\n",
-                 sp2->index, sp2->name); lineno++;
-         sp2->destLineno = -1;  /* Avoid emitting this destructor again */
-      }
-    }
-
-    emit_destructor_code(out,lemp->symbols[i],lemp,&lineno);
-    fprintf(out,"      break;\n"); lineno++;
-  }
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate code which executes whenever the parser stack overflows */
-  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->overflow,&lineno);
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate the table of rule information
-  **
-  ** Note: This code depends on the fact that rules are number
-  ** sequentually beginning with 0.
-  */
-  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    fprintf(out,"  { %d, %d },\n",rp->lhs->index,-rp->nrhs); lineno++;
-  }
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate code which execution during each REDUCE action */
-  i = 0;
-  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    i += translate_code(lemp, rp);
-  }
-  if( i ){
-    fprintf(out,"        YYMINORTYPE yylhsminor;\n"); lineno++;
-  }
-  /* First output rules other than the default: rule */
-  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    struct rule *rp2;               /* Other rules with the same action */
-    if( rp->codeEmitted ) continue;
-    if( rp->noCode ){
-      /* No C code actions, so this will be part of the "default:" rule */
-      continue;
-    }
-    fprintf(out,"      case %d: /* ", rp->iRule);
-    writeRuleText(out, rp);
-    fprintf(out, " */\n"); lineno++;
-    for(rp2=rp->next; rp2; rp2=rp2->next){
-      if( rp2->code==rp->code && rp2->codePrefix==rp->codePrefix
-             && rp2->codeSuffix==rp->codeSuffix ){
-        fprintf(out,"      case %d: /* ", rp2->iRule);
-        writeRuleText(out, rp2);
-        fprintf(out," */ yytestcase(yyruleno==%d);\n", rp2->iRule); lineno++;
-        rp2->codeEmitted = 1;
-      }
-    }
-    emit_code(out,rp,lemp,&lineno);
-    fprintf(out,"        break;\n"); lineno++;
-    rp->codeEmitted = 1;
-  }
-  /* Finally, output the default: rule.  We choose as the default: all
-  ** empty actions. */
-  fprintf(out,"      default:\n"); lineno++;
-  for(rp=lemp->rule; rp; rp=rp->next){
-    if( rp->codeEmitted ) continue;
-    assert( rp->noCode );
-    fprintf(out,"      /* (%d) ", rp->iRule);
-    writeRuleText(out, rp);
-    if( rp->doesReduce ){
-      fprintf(out, " */ yytestcase(yyruleno==%d);\n", rp->iRule); lineno++;
-    }else{
-      fprintf(out, " (OPTIMIZED OUT) */ assert(yyruleno!=%d);\n",
-              rp->iRule); lineno++;
-    }
-  }
-  fprintf(out,"        break;\n"); lineno++;
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate code which executes if a parse fails */
-  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->failure,&lineno);
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate code which executes when a syntax error occurs */
-  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->error,&lineno);
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Generate code which executes when the parser accepts its input */
-  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->accept,&lineno);
-  tplt_xfer(lemp->name,in,out,&lineno);
-
-  /* Append any addition code the user desires */
-  tplt_print(out,lemp,lemp->extracode,&lineno);
-
-  fclose(in);
-  fclose(out);
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Generate a header file for the parser */
-void ReportHeader(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  FILE *out, *in;
-  const char *prefix;
-  char line[LINESIZE];
-  char pattern[LINESIZE];
-  int i;
-
-  if( lemp->tokenprefix ) prefix = lemp->tokenprefix;
-  else                    prefix = "";
-  in = file_open(lemp,".h","rb");
-  if( in ){
-    int nextChar;
-    for(i=1; i<lemp->nterminal && fgets(line,LINESIZE,in); i++){
-      lemon_sprintf(pattern,"#define %s%-30s %3d\n",
-                    prefix,lemp->symbols[i]->name,i);
-      if( strcmp(line,pattern) ) break;
-    }
-    nextChar = fgetc(in);
-    fclose(in);
-    if( i==lemp->nterminal && nextChar==EOF ){
-      /* No change in the file.  Don't rewrite it. */
-      return;
-    }
-  }
-  out = file_open(lemp,".h","wb");
-  if( out ){
-    for(i=1; i<lemp->nterminal; i++){
-      fprintf(out,"#define %s%-30s %3d\n",prefix,lemp->symbols[i]->name,i);
-    }
-    fclose(out);
-  }
-  return;
-}
-
-/* Reduce the size of the action tables, if possible, by making use
-** of defaults.
-**
-** In this version, we take the most frequent REDUCE action and make
-** it the default.  Except, there is no default if the wildcard token
-** is a possible look-ahead.
-*/
-void CompressTables(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  struct state *stp;
-  struct action *ap, *ap2, *nextap;
-  struct rule *rp, *rp2, *rbest;
-  int nbest, n;
-  int i;
-  int usesWildcard;
-
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    nbest = 0;
-    rbest = 0;
-    usesWildcard = 0;
-
-    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-      if( ap->type==SHIFT && ap->sp==lemp->wildcard ){
-        usesWildcard = 1;
-      }
-      if( ap->type!=REDUCE ) continue;
-      rp = ap->x.rp;
-      if( rp->lhsStart ) continue;
-      if( rp==rbest ) continue;
-      n = 1;
-      for(ap2=ap->next; ap2; ap2=ap2->next){
-        if( ap2->type!=REDUCE ) continue;
-        rp2 = ap2->x.rp;
-        if( rp2==rbest ) continue;
-        if( rp2==rp ) n++;
-      }
-      if( n>nbest ){
-        nbest = n;
-        rbest = rp;
-      }
-    }
-
-    /* Do not make a default if the number of rules to default
-    ** is not at least 1 or if the wildcard token is a possible
-    ** lookahead.
-    */
-    if( nbest<1 || usesWildcard ) continue;
-
-
-    /* Combine matching REDUCE actions into a single default */
-    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-      if( ap->type==REDUCE && ap->x.rp==rbest ) break;
-    }
-    assert( ap );
-    ap->sp = Symbol_new("{default}");
-    for(ap=ap->next; ap; ap=ap->next){
-      if( ap->type==REDUCE && ap->x.rp==rbest ) ap->type = NOT_USED;
-    }
-    stp->ap = Action_sort(stp->ap);
-
-    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-      if( ap->type==SHIFT ) break;
-      if( ap->type==REDUCE && ap->x.rp!=rbest ) break;
-    }
-    if( ap==0 ){
-      stp->autoReduce = 1;
-      stp->pDfltReduce = rbest;
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* Make a second pass over all states and actions.  Convert
-  ** every action that is a SHIFT to an autoReduce state into
-  ** a SHIFTREDUCE action.
-  */
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-      struct state *pNextState;
-      if( ap->type!=SHIFT ) continue;
-      pNextState = ap->x.stp;
-      if( pNextState->autoReduce && pNextState->pDfltReduce!=0 ){
-        ap->type = SHIFTREDUCE;
-        ap->x.rp = pNextState->pDfltReduce;
-      }
-    }
-  }
-
-  /* If a SHIFTREDUCE action specifies a rule that has a single RHS term
-  ** (meaning that the SHIFTREDUCE will land back in the state where it
-  ** started) and if there is no C-code associated with the reduce action,
-  ** then we can go ahead and convert the action to be the same as the
-  ** action for the RHS of the rule.
-  */
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=nextap){
-      nextap = ap->next;
-      if( ap->type!=SHIFTREDUCE ) continue;
-      rp = ap->x.rp;
-      if( rp->noCode==0 ) continue;
-      if( rp->nrhs!=1 ) continue;
-#if 1
-      /* Only apply this optimization to non-terminals.  It would be OK to
-      ** apply it to terminal symbols too, but that makes the parser tables
-      ** larger. */
-      if( ap->sp->index<lemp->nterminal ) continue;
-#endif
-      /* If we reach this point, it means the optimization can be applied */
-      nextap = ap;
-      for(ap2=stp->ap; ap2 && (ap2==ap || ap2->sp!=rp->lhs); ap2=ap2->next){}
-      assert( ap2!=0 );
-      ap->spOpt = ap2->sp;
-      ap->type = ap2->type;
-      ap->x = ap2->x;
-    }
-  }
-}
-
-
-/*
-** Compare two states for sorting purposes.  The smaller state is the
-** one with the most non-terminal actions.  If they have the same number
-** of non-terminal actions, then the smaller is the one with the most
-** token actions.
-*/
-static int stateResortCompare(const void *a, const void *b){
-  const struct state *pA = *(const struct state**)a;
-  const struct state *pB = *(const struct state**)b;
-  int n;
-
-  n = pB->nNtAct - pA->nNtAct;
-  if( n==0 ){
-    n = pB->nTknAct - pA->nTknAct;
-    if( n==0 ){
-      n = pB->statenum - pA->statenum;
-    }
-  }
-  assert( n!=0 );
-  return n;
-}
-
-
-/*
-** Renumber and resort states so that states with fewer choices
-** occur at the end.  Except, keep state 0 as the first state.
-*/
-void ResortStates(struct lemon *lemp)
-{
-  int i;
-  struct state *stp;
-  struct action *ap;
-
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    stp = lemp->sorted[i];
-    stp->nTknAct = stp->nNtAct = 0;
-    stp->iDfltReduce = lemp->nrule;  /* Init dflt action to "syntax error" */
-    stp->iTknOfst = NO_OFFSET;
-    stp->iNtOfst = NO_OFFSET;
-    for(ap=stp->ap; ap; ap=ap->next){
-      int iAction = compute_action(lemp,ap);
-      if( iAction>=0 ){
-        if( ap->sp->index<lemp->nterminal ){
-          stp->nTknAct++;
-        }else if( ap->sp->index<lemp->nsymbol ){
-          stp->nNtAct++;
-        }else{
-          assert( stp->autoReduce==0 || stp->pDfltReduce==ap->x.rp );
-          stp->iDfltReduce = iAction - lemp->nstate - lemp->nrule;
-        }
-      }
-    }
-  }
-  qsort(&lemp->sorted[1], lemp->nstate-1, sizeof(lemp->sorted[0]),
-        stateResortCompare);
-  for(i=0; i<lemp->nstate; i++){
-    lemp->sorted[i]->statenum = i;
-  }
-  lemp->nxstate = lemp->nstate;
-  while( lemp->nxstate>1 && lemp->sorted[lemp->nxstate-1]->autoReduce ){
-    lemp->nxstate--;
-  }
-}
-
-
-/***************** From the file "set.c" ************************************/
-/*
-** Set manipulation routines for the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-
-static int size = 0;
-
-/* Set the set size */
-void SetSize(int n)
-{
-  size = n+1;
-}
-
-/* Allocate a new set */
-char *SetNew(void){
-  char *s;
-  s = (char*)calloc( size, 1);
-  if( s==0 ){
-    extern void memory_error();
-    memory_error();
-  }
-  return s;
-}
-
-/* Deallocate a set */
-void SetFree(char *s)
-{
-  free(s);
-}
-
-/* Add a new element to the set.  Return TRUE if the element was added
-** and FALSE if it was already there. */
-int SetAdd(char *s, int e)
-{
-  int rv;
-  assert( e>=0 && e<size );
-  rv = s[e];
-  s[e] = 1;
-  return !rv;
-}
-
-/* Add every element of s2 to s1.  Return TRUE if s1 changes. */
-int SetUnion(char *s1, char *s2)
-{
-  int i, progress;
-  progress = 0;
-  for(i=0; i<size; i++){
-    if( s2[i]==0 ) continue;
-    if( s1[i]==0 ){
-      progress = 1;
-      s1[i] = 1;
-    }
-  }
-  return progress;
-}
-/********************** From the file "table.c" ****************************/
-/*
-** All code in this file has been automatically generated
-** from a specification in the file
-**              "table.q"
-** by the associative array code building program "aagen".
-** Do not edit this file!  Instead, edit the specification
-** file, then rerun aagen.
-*/
-/*
-** Code for processing tables in the LEMON parser generator.
-*/
-
-PRIVATE unsigned strhash(const char *x)
-{
-  unsigned h = 0;
-  while( *x ) h = h*13 + *(x++);
-  return h;
-}
-
-/* Works like strdup, sort of.  Save a string in malloced memory, but
-** keep strings in a table so that the same string is not in more
-** than one place.
-*/
-const char *Strsafe(const char *y)
-{
-  const char *z;
-  char *cpy;
-
-  if( y==0 ) return 0;
-  z = Strsafe_find(y);
-  if( z==0 && (cpy=(char *)malloc( lemonStrlen(y)+1 ))!=0 ){
-    lemon_strcpy(cpy,y);
-    z = cpy;
-    Strsafe_insert(z);
-  }
-  MemoryCheck(z);
-  return z;
-}
-
-/* There is one instance of the following structure for each
-** associative array of type "x1".
-*/
-struct s_x1 {
-  int size;               /* The number of available slots. */
-                          /*   Must be a power of 2 greater than or */
-                          /*   equal to 1 */
-  int count;              /* Number of currently slots filled */
-  struct s_x1node *tbl;  /* The data stored here */
-  struct s_x1node **ht;  /* Hash table for lookups */
-};
-
-/* There is one instance of this structure for every data element
-** in an associative array of type "x1".
-*/
-typedef struct s_x1node {
-  const char *data;        /* The data */
-  struct s_x1node *next;   /* Next entry with the same hash */
-  struct s_x1node **from;  /* Previous link */
-} x1node;
-
-/* There is only one instance of the array, which is the following */
-static struct s_x1 *x1a;
-
-/* Allocate a new associative array */
-void Strsafe_init(void){
-  if( x1a ) return;
-  x1a = (struct s_x1*)malloc( sizeof(struct s_x1) );
-  if( x1a ){
-    x1a->size = 1024;
-    x1a->count = 0;
-    x1a->tbl = (x1node*)calloc(1024, sizeof(x1node) + sizeof(x1node*));
-    if( x1a->tbl==0 ){
-      free(x1a);
-      x1a = 0;
-    }else{
-      int i;
-      x1a->ht = (x1node**)&(x1a->tbl[1024]);
-      for(i=0; i<1024; i++) x1a->ht[i] = 0;
-    }
-  }
-}
-/* Insert a new record into the array.  Return TRUE if successful.
-** Prior data with the same key is NOT overwritten */
-int Strsafe_insert(const char *data)
-{
-  x1node *np;
-  unsigned h;
-  unsigned ph;
-
-  if( x1a==0 ) return 0;
-  ph = strhash(data);
-  h = ph & (x1a->size-1);
-  np = x1a->ht[h];
-  while( np ){
-    if( strcmp(np->data,data)==0 ){
-      /* An existing entry with the same key is found. */
-      /* Fail because overwrite is not allows. */
-      return 0;
-    }
-    np = np->next;
-  }
-  if( x1a->count>=x1a->size ){
-    /* Need to make the hash table bigger */
-    int i,arrSize;
-    struct s_x1 array;
-    array.size = arrSize = x1a->size*2;
-    array.count = x1a->count;
-    array.tbl = (x1node*)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(x1node) + sizeof(x1node*));
-    if( array.tbl==0 ) return 0;  /* Fail due to malloc failure */
-    array.ht = (x1node**)&(array.tbl[arrSize]);
-    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array.ht[i] = 0;
-    for(i=0; i<x1a->count; i++){
-      x1node *oldnp, *newnp;
-      oldnp = &(x1a->tbl[i]);
-      h = strhash(oldnp->data) & (arrSize-1);
-      newnp = &(array.tbl[i]);
-      if( array.ht[h] ) array.ht[h]->from = &(newnp->next);
-      newnp->next = array.ht[h];
-      newnp->data = oldnp->data;
-      newnp->from = &(array.ht[h]);
-      array.ht[h] = newnp;
-    }
-    free(x1a->tbl);
-    *x1a = array;
-  }
-  /* Insert the new data */
-  h = ph & (x1a->size-1);
-  np = &(x1a->tbl[x1a->count++]);
-  np->data = data;
-  if( x1a->ht[h] ) x1a->ht[h]->from = &(np->next);
-  np->next = x1a->ht[h];
-  x1a->ht[h] = np;
-  np->from = &(x1a->ht[h]);
-  return 1;
-}
-
-/* Return a pointer to data assigned to the given key.  Return NULL
-** if no such key. */
-const char *Strsafe_find(const char *key)
-{
-  unsigned h;
-  x1node *np;
-
-  if( x1a==0 ) return 0;
-  h = strhash(key) & (x1a->size-1);
-  np = x1a->ht[h];
-  while( np ){
-    if( strcmp(np->data,key)==0 ) break;
-    np = np->next;
-  }
-  return np ? np->data : 0;
-}
-
-/* Return a pointer to the (terminal or nonterminal) symbol "x".
-** Create a new symbol if this is the first time "x" has been seen.
-*/
-struct symbol *Symbol_new(const char *x)
-{
-  struct symbol *sp;
-
-  sp = Symbol_find(x);
-  if( sp==0 ){
-    sp = (struct symbol *)calloc(1, sizeof(struct symbol) );
-    MemoryCheck(sp);
-    sp->name = Strsafe(x);
-    sp->type = ISUPPER(*x) ? TERMINAL : NONTERMINAL;
-    sp->rule = 0;
-    sp->fallback = 0;
-    sp->prec = -1;
-    sp->assoc = UNK;
-    sp->firstset = 0;
-    sp->lambda = LEMON_FALSE;
-    sp->destructor = 0;
-    sp->destLineno = 0;
-    sp->datatype = 0;
-    sp->useCnt = 0;
-    Symbol_insert(sp,sp->name);
-  }
-  sp->useCnt++;
-  return sp;
-}
-
-/* Compare two symbols for sorting purposes.  Return negative,
-** zero, or positive if a is less then, equal to, or greater
-** than b.
-**
-** Symbols that begin with upper case letters (terminals or tokens)
-** must sort before symbols that begin with lower case letters
-** (non-terminals).  And MULTITERMINAL symbols (created using the
-** %token_class directive) must sort at the very end. Other than
-** that, the order does not matter.
-**
-** We find experimentally that leaving the symbols in their original
-** order (the order they appeared in the grammar file) gives the
-** smallest parser tables in SQLite.
-*/
-int Symbolcmpp(const void *_a, const void *_b)
-{
-  const struct symbol *a = *(const struct symbol **) _a;
-  const struct symbol *b = *(const struct symbol **) _b;
-  int i1 = a->type==MULTITERMINAL ? 3 : a->name[0]>'Z' ? 2 : 1;
-  int i2 = b->type==MULTITERMINAL ? 3 : b->name[0]>'Z' ? 2 : 1;
-  return i1==i2 ? a->index - b->index : i1 - i2;
-}
-
-/* There is one instance of the following structure for each
-** associative array of type "x2".
-*/
-struct s_x2 {
-  int size;               /* The number of available slots. */
-                          /*   Must be a power of 2 greater than or */
-                          /*   equal to 1 */
-  int count;              /* Number of currently slots filled */
-  struct s_x2node *tbl;  /* The data stored here */
-  struct s_x2node **ht;  /* Hash table for lookups */
-};
-
-/* There is one instance of this structure for every data element
-** in an associative array of type "x2".
-*/
-typedef struct s_x2node {
-  struct symbol *data;     /* The data */
-  const char *key;         /* The key */
-  struct s_x2node *next;   /* Next entry with the same hash */
-  struct s_x2node **from;  /* Previous link */
-} x2node;
-
-/* There is only one instance of the array, which is the following */
-static struct s_x2 *x2a;
-
-/* Allocate a new associative array */
-void Symbol_init(void){
-  if( x2a ) return;
-  x2a = (struct s_x2*)malloc( sizeof(struct s_x2) );
-  if( x2a ){
-    x2a->size = 128;
-    x2a->count = 0;
-    x2a->tbl = (x2node*)calloc(128, sizeof(x2node) + sizeof(x2node*));
-    if( x2a->tbl==0 ){
-      free(x2a);
-      x2a = 0;
-    }else{
-      int i;
-      x2a->ht = (x2node**)&(x2a->tbl[128]);
-      for(i=0; i<128; i++) x2a->ht[i] = 0;
-    }
-  }
-}
-/* Insert a new record into the array.  Return TRUE if successful.
-** Prior data with the same key is NOT overwritten */
-int Symbol_insert(struct symbol *data, const char *key)
-{
-  x2node *np;
-  unsigned h;
-  unsigned ph;
-
-  if( x2a==0 ) return 0;
-  ph = strhash(key);
-  h = ph & (x2a->size-1);
-  np = x2a->ht[h];
-  while( np ){
-    if( strcmp(np->key,key)==0 ){
-      /* An existing entry with the same key is found. */
-      /* Fail because overwrite is not allows. */
-      return 0;
-    }
-    np = np->next;
-  }
-  if( x2a->count>=x2a->size ){
-    /* Need to make the hash table bigger */
-    int i,arrSize;
-    struct s_x2 array;
-    array.size = arrSize = x2a->size*2;
-    array.count = x2a->count;
-    array.tbl = (x2node*)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(x2node) + sizeof(x2node*));
-    if( array.tbl==0 ) return 0;  /* Fail due to malloc failure */
-    array.ht = (x2node**)&(array.tbl[arrSize]);
-    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array.ht[i] = 0;
-    for(i=0; i<x2a->count; i++){
-      x2node *oldnp, *newnp;
-      oldnp = &(x2a->tbl[i]);
-      h = strhash(oldnp->key) & (arrSize-1);
-      newnp = &(array.tbl[i]);
-      if( array.ht[h] ) array.ht[h]->from = &(newnp->next);
-      newnp->next = array.ht[h];
-      newnp->key = oldnp->key;
-      newnp->data = oldnp->data;
-      newnp->from = &(array.ht[h]);
-      array.ht[h] = newnp;
-    }
-    free(x2a->tbl);
-    *x2a = array;
-  }
-  /* Insert the new data */
-  h = ph & (x2a->size-1);
-  np = &(x2a->tbl[x2a->count++]);
-  np->key = key;
-  np->data = data;
-  if( x2a->ht[h] ) x2a->ht[h]->from = &(np->next);
-  np->next = x2a->ht[h];
-  x2a->ht[h] = np;
-  np->from = &(x2a->ht[h]);
-  return 1;
-}
-
-/* Return a pointer to data assigned to the given key.  Return NULL
-** if no such key. */
-struct symbol *Symbol_find(const char *key)
-{
-  unsigned h;
-  x2node *np;
-
-  if( x2a==0 ) return 0;
-  h = strhash(key) & (x2a->size-1);
-  np = x2a->ht[h];
-  while( np ){
-    if( strcmp(np->key,key)==0 ) break;
-    np = np->next;
-  }
-  return np ? np->data : 0;
-}
-
-/* Return the n-th data.  Return NULL if n is out of range. */
-struct symbol *Symbol_Nth(int n)
-{
-  struct symbol *data;
-  if( x2a && n>0 && n<=x2a->count ){
-    data = x2a->tbl[n-1].data;
-  }else{
-    data = 0;
-  }
-  return data;
-}
-
-/* Return the size of the array */
-int Symbol_count()
-{
-  return x2a ? x2a->count : 0;
-}
-
-/* Return an array of pointers to all data in the table.
-** The array is obtained from malloc.  Return NULL if memory allocation
-** problems, or if the array is empty. */
-struct symbol **Symbol_arrayof()
-{
-  struct symbol **array;
-  int i,arrSize;
-  if( x2a==0 ) return 0;
-  arrSize = x2a->count;
-  array = (struct symbol **)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(struct symbol *));
-  if( array ){
-    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array[i] = x2a->tbl[i].data;
-  }
-  return array;
-}
-
-/* Compare two configurations */
-int Configcmp(const char *_a,const char *_b)
-{
-  const struct config *a = (struct config *) _a;
-  const struct config *b = (struct config *) _b;
-  int x;
-  x = a->rp->index - b->rp->index;
-  if( x==0 ) x = a->dot - b->dot;
-  return x;
-}
-
-/* Compare two states */
-PRIVATE int statecmp(struct config *a, struct config *b)
-{
-  int rc;
-  for(rc=0; rc==0 && a && b;  a=a->bp, b=b->bp){
-    rc = a->rp->index - b->rp->index;
-    if( rc==0 ) rc = a->dot - b->dot;
-  }
-  if( rc==0 ){
-    if( a ) rc = 1;
-    if( b ) rc = -1;
-  }
-  return rc;
-}
-
-/* Hash a state */
-PRIVATE unsigned statehash(struct config *a)
-{
-  unsigned h=0;
-  while( a ){
-    h = h*571 + a->rp->index*37 + a->dot;
-    a = a->bp;
-  }
-  return h;
-}
-
-/* Allocate a new state structure */
-struct state *State_new()
-{
-  struct state *newstate;
-  newstate = (struct state *)calloc(1, sizeof(struct state) );
-  MemoryCheck(newstate);
-  return newstate;
-}
-
-/* There is one instance of the following structure for each
-** associative array of type "x3".
-*/
-struct s_x3 {
-  int size;               /* The number of available slots. */
-                          /*   Must be a power of 2 greater than or */
-                          /*   equal to 1 */
-  int count;              /* Number of currently slots filled */
-  struct s_x3node *tbl;  /* The data stored here */
-  struct s_x3node **ht;  /* Hash table for lookups */
-};
-
-/* There is one instance of this structure for every data element
-** in an associative array of type "x3".
-*/
-typedef struct s_x3node {
-  struct state *data;                  /* The data */
-  struct config *key;                   /* The key */
-  struct s_x3node *next;   /* Next entry with the same hash */
-  struct s_x3node **from;  /* Previous link */
-} x3node;
-
-/* There is only one instance of the array, which is the following */
-static struct s_x3 *x3a;
-
-/* Allocate a new associative array */
-void State_init(void){
-  if( x3a ) return;
-  x3a = (struct s_x3*)malloc( sizeof(struct s_x3) );
-  if( x3a ){
-    x3a->size = 128;
-    x3a->count = 0;
-    x3a->tbl = (x3node*)calloc(128, sizeof(x3node) + sizeof(x3node*));
-    if( x3a->tbl==0 ){
-      free(x3a);
-      x3a = 0;
-    }else{
-      int i;
-      x3a->ht = (x3node**)&(x3a->tbl[128]);
-      for(i=0; i<128; i++) x3a->ht[i] = 0;
-    }
-  }
-}
-/* Insert a new record into the array.  Return TRUE if successful.
-** Prior data with the same key is NOT overwritten */
-int State_insert(struct state *data, struct config *key)
-{
-  x3node *np;
-  unsigned h;
-  unsigned ph;
-
-  if( x3a==0 ) return 0;
-  ph = statehash(key);
-  h = ph & (x3a->size-1);
-  np = x3a->ht[h];
-  while( np ){
-    if( statecmp(np->key,key)==0 ){
-      /* An existing entry with the same key is found. */
-      /* Fail because overwrite is not allows. */
-      return 0;
-    }
-    np = np->next;
-  }
-  if( x3a->count>=x3a->size ){
-    /* Need to make the hash table bigger */
-    int i,arrSize;
-    struct s_x3 array;
-    array.size = arrSize = x3a->size*2;
-    array.count = x3a->count;
-    array.tbl = (x3node*)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(x3node) + sizeof(x3node*));
-    if( array.tbl==0 ) return 0;  /* Fail due to malloc failure */
-    array.ht = (x3node**)&(array.tbl[arrSize]);
-    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array.ht[i] = 0;
-    for(i=0; i<x3a->count; i++){
-      x3node *oldnp, *newnp;
-      oldnp = &(x3a->tbl[i]);
-      h = statehash(oldnp->key) & (arrSize-1);
-      newnp = &(array.tbl[i]);
-      if( array.ht[h] ) array.ht[h]->from = &(newnp->next);
-      newnp->next = array.ht[h];
-      newnp->key = oldnp->key;
-      newnp->data = oldnp->data;
-      newnp->from = &(array.ht[h]);
-      array.ht[h] = newnp;
-    }
-    free(x3a->tbl);
-    *x3a = array;
-  }
-  /* Insert the new data */
-  h = ph & (x3a->size-1);
-  np = &(x3a->tbl[x3a->count++]);
-  np->key = key;
-  np->data = data;
-  if( x3a->ht[h] ) x3a->ht[h]->from = &(np->next);
-  np->next = x3a->ht[h];
-  x3a->ht[h] = np;
-  np->from = &(x3a->ht[h]);
-  return 1;
-}
-
-/* Return a pointer to data assigned to the given key.  Return NULL
-** if no such key. */
-struct state *State_find(struct config *key)
-{
-  unsigned h;
-  x3node *np;
-
-  if( x3a==0 ) return 0;
-  h = statehash(key) & (x3a->size-1);
-  np = x3a->ht[h];
-  while( np ){
-    if( statecmp(np->key,key)==0 ) break;
-    np = np->next;
-  }
-  return np ? np->data : 0;
-}
-
-/* Return an array of pointers to all data in the table.
-** The array is obtained from malloc.  Return NULL if memory allocation
-** problems, or if the array is empty. */
-struct state **State_arrayof(void)
-{
-  struct state **array;
-  int i,arrSize;
-  if( x3a==0 ) return 0;
-  arrSize = x3a->count;
-  array = (struct state **)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(struct state *));
-  if( array ){
-    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array[i] = x3a->tbl[i].data;
-  }
-  return array;
-}
-
-/* Hash a configuration */
-PRIVATE unsigned confighash(struct config *a)
-{
-  unsigned h=0;
-  h = h*571 + a->rp->index*37 + a->dot;
-  return h;
-}
-
-/* There is one instance of the following structure for each
-** associative array of type "x4".
-*/
-struct s_x4 {
-  int size;               /* The number of available slots. */
-                          /*   Must be a power of 2 greater than or */
-                          /*   equal to 1 */
-  int count;              /* Number of currently slots filled */
-  struct s_x4node *tbl;  /* The data stored here */
-  struct s_x4node **ht;  /* Hash table for lookups */
-};
-
-/* There is one instance of this structure for every data element
-** in an associative array of type "x4".
-*/
-typedef struct s_x4node {
-  struct config *data;                  /* The data */
-  struct s_x4node *next;   /* Next entry with the same hash */
-  struct s_x4node **from;  /* Previous link */
-} x4node;
-
-/* There is only one instance of the array, which is the following */
-static struct s_x4 *x4a;
-
-/* Allocate a new associative array */
-void Configtable_init(void){
-  if( x4a ) return;
-  x4a = (struct s_x4*)malloc( sizeof(struct s_x4) );
-  if( x4a ){
-    x4a->size = 64;
-    x4a->count = 0;
-    x4a->tbl = (x4node*)calloc(64, sizeof(x4node) + sizeof(x4node*));
-    if( x4a->tbl==0 ){
-      free(x4a);
-      x4a = 0;
-    }else{
-      int i;
-      x4a->ht = (x4node**)&(x4a->tbl[64]);
-      for(i=0; i<64; i++) x4a->ht[i] = 0;
-    }
-  }
-}
-/* Insert a new record into the array.  Return TRUE if successful.
-** Prior data with the same key is NOT overwritten */
-int Configtable_insert(struct config *data)
-{
-  x4node *np;
-  unsigned h;
-  unsigned ph;
-
-  if( x4a==0 ) return 0;
-  ph = confighash(data);
-  h = ph & (x4a->size-1);
-  np = x4a->ht[h];
-  while( np ){
-    if( Configcmp((const char *) np->data,(const char *) data)==0 ){
-      /* An existing entry with the same key is found. */
-      /* Fail because overwrite is not allows. */
-      return 0;
-    }
-    np = np->next;
-  }
-  if( x4a->count>=x4a->size ){
-    /* Need to make the hash table bigger */
-    int i,arrSize;
-    struct s_x4 array;
-    array.size = arrSize = x4a->size*2;
-    array.count = x4a->count;
-    array.tbl = (x4node*)calloc(arrSize, sizeof(x4node) + sizeof(x4node*));
-    if( array.tbl==0 ) return 0;  /* Fail due to malloc failure */
-    array.ht = (x4node**)&(array.tbl[arrSize]);
-    for(i=0; i<arrSize; i++) array.ht[i] = 0;
-    for(i=0; i<x4a->count; i++){
-      x4node *oldnp, *newnp;
-      oldnp = &(x4a->tbl[i]);
-      h = confighash(oldnp->data) & (arrSize-1);
-      newnp = &(array.tbl[i]);
-      if( array.ht[h] ) array.ht[h]->from = &(newnp->next);
-      newnp->next = array.ht[h];
-      newnp->data = oldnp->data;
-      newnp->from = &(array.ht[h]);
-      array.ht[h] = newnp;
-    }
-    free(x4a->tbl);
-    *x4a = array;
-  }
-  /* Insert the new data */
-  h = ph & (x4a->size-1);
-  np = &(x4a->tbl[x4a->count++]);
-  np->data = data;
-  if( x4a->ht[h] ) x4a->ht[h]->from = &(np->next);
-  np->next = x4a->ht[h];
-  x4a->ht[h] = np;
-  np->from = &(x4a->ht[h]);
-  return 1;
-}
-
-/* Return a pointer to data assigned to the given key.  Return NULL
-** if no such key. */
-struct config *Configtable_find(struct config *key)
-{
-  int h;
-  x4node *np;
-
-  if( x4a==0 ) return 0;
-  h = confighash(key) & (x4a->size-1);
-  np = x4a->ht[h];
-  while( np ){
-    if( Configcmp((const char *) np->data,(const char *) key)==0 ) break;
-    np = np->next;
-  }
-  return np ? np->data : 0;
-}
-
-/* Remove all data from the table.  Pass each data to the function "f"
-** as it is removed.  ("f" may be null to avoid this step.) */
-void Configtable_clear(int(*f)(struct config *))
-{
-  int i;
-  if( x4a==0 || x4a->count==0 ) return;
-  if( f ) for(i=0; i<x4a->count; i++) (*f)(x4a->tbl[i].data);
-  for(i=0; i<x4a->size; i++) x4a->ht[i] = 0;
-  x4a->count = 0;
-  return;
-}

tools/lemon/lempar.c

@@ -1,981 +0,0 @@
-/*
-** 2000-05-29
-**
-** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.  In place of
-** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
-**
-**    May you do good and not evil.
-**    May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
-**    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
-**
-*************************************************************************
-** Driver template for the LEMON parser generator.
-**
-** The "lemon" program processes an LALR(1) input grammar file, then uses
-** this template to construct a parser.  The "lemon" program inserts text
-** at each "%%" line.  Also, any "P-a-r-s-e" identifier prefix (without the
-** interstitial "-" characters) contained in this template is changed into
-** the value of the %name directive from the grammar.  Otherwise, the content
-** of this template is copied straight through into the generate parser
-** source file.
-**
-** The following is the concatenation of all %include directives from the
-** input grammar file:
-*/
-#include <stdio.h>
-/************ Begin %include sections from the grammar ************************/
-%%
-/**************** End of %include directives **********************************/
-/* These constants specify the various numeric values for terminal symbols
-** in a format understandable to "makeheaders".  This section is blank unless
-** "lemon" is run with the "-m" command-line option.
-***************** Begin makeheaders token definitions *************************/
-%%
-/**************** End makeheaders token definitions ***************************/
-
-/* The next sections is a series of control #defines.
-** various aspects of the generated parser.
-**    YYCODETYPE         is the data type used to store the integer codes
-**                       that represent terminal and non-terminal symbols.
-**                       "unsigned char" is used if there are fewer than
-**                       256 symbols.  Larger types otherwise.
-**    YYNOCODE           is a number of type YYCODETYPE that is not used for
-**                       any terminal or nonterminal symbol.
-**    YYFALLBACK         If defined, this indicates that one or more tokens
-**                       (also known as: "terminal symbols") have fall-back
-**                       values which should be used if the original symbol
-**                       would not parse.  This permits keywords to sometimes
-**                       be used as identifiers, for example.
-**    YYACTIONTYPE       is the data type used for "action codes" - numbers
-**                       that indicate what to do in response to the next
-**                       token.
-**    ParseTOKENTYPE     is the data type used for minor type for terminal
-**                       symbols.  Background: A "minor type" is a semantic
-**                       value associated with a terminal or non-terminal
-**                       symbols.  For example, for an "ID" terminal symbol,
-**                       the minor type might be the name of the identifier.
-**                       Each non-terminal can have a different minor type.
-**                       Terminal symbols all have the same minor type, though.
-**                       This macros defines the minor type for terminal 
-**                       symbols.
-**    YYMINORTYPE        is the data type used for all minor types.
-**                       This is typically a union of many types, one of
-**                       which is ParseTOKENTYPE.  The entry in the union
-**                       for terminal symbols is called "yy0".
-**    YYSTACKDEPTH       is the maximum depth of the parser's stack.  If
-**                       zero the stack is dynamically sized using realloc()
-**    ParseARG_SDECL     A static variable declaration for the %extra_argument
-**    ParseARG_PDECL     A parameter declaration for the %extra_argument
-**    ParseARG_STORE     Code to store %extra_argument into yypParser
-**    ParseARG_FETCH     Code to extract %extra_argument from yypParser
-**    YYERRORSYMBOL      is the code number of the error symbol.  If not
-**                       defined, then do no error processing.
-**    YYNSTATE           the combined number of states.
-**    YYNRULE            the number of rules in the grammar
-**    YY_MAX_SHIFT       Maximum value for shift actions
-**    YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE Minimum value for shift-reduce actions
-**    YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE Maximum value for shift-reduce actions
-**    YY_MIN_REDUCE      Minimum value for reduce actions
-**    YY_MAX_REDUCE      Maximum value for reduce actions
-**    YY_ERROR_ACTION    The yy_action[] code for syntax error
-**    YY_ACCEPT_ACTION   The yy_action[] code for accept
-**    YY_NO_ACTION       The yy_action[] code for no-op
-*/
-#ifndef INTERFACE
-# define INTERFACE 1
-#endif
-/************* Begin control #defines *****************************************/
-%%
-/************* End control #defines *******************************************/
-
-/* Define the yytestcase() macro to be a no-op if is not already defined
-** otherwise.
-**
-** Applications can choose to define yytestcase() in the %include section
-** to a macro that can assist in verifying code coverage.  For production
-** code the yytestcase() macro should be turned off.  But it is useful
-** for testing.
-*/
-#ifndef yytestcase
-# define yytestcase(X)
-#endif
-
-
-/* Next are the tables used to determine what action to take based on the
-** current state and lookahead token.  These tables are used to implement
-** functions that take a state number and lookahead value and return an
-** action integer.  
-**
-** Suppose the action integer is N.  Then the action is determined as
-** follows
-**
-**   0 <= N <= YY_MAX_SHIFT             Shift N.  That is, push the lookahead
-**                                      token onto the stack and goto state N.
-**
-**   N between YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE       Shift to an arbitrary state then
-**     and YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE           reduce by rule N-YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE.
-**
-**   N between YY_MIN_REDUCE            Reduce by rule N-YY_MIN_REDUCE
-**     and YY_MAX_REDUCE
-**
-**   N == YY_ERROR_ACTION               A syntax error has occurred.
-**
-**   N == YY_ACCEPT_ACTION              The parser accepts its input.
-**
-**   N == YY_NO_ACTION                  No such action.  Denotes unused
-**                                      slots in the yy_action[] table.
-**
-** The action table is constructed as a single large table named yy_action[].
-** Given state S and lookahead X, the action is computed as either:
-**
-**    (A)   N = yy_action[ yy_shift_ofst[S] + X ]
-**    (B)   N = yy_default[S]
-**
-** The (A) formula is preferred.  The B formula is used instead if:
-**    (1)  The yy_shift_ofst[S]+X value is out of range, or
-**    (2)  yy_lookahead[yy_shift_ofst[S]+X] is not equal to X, or
-**    (3)  yy_shift_ofst[S] equal YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT.
-** (Implementation note: YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT is chosen so that
-** YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT+X will be out of range for all possible lookaheads X.
-** Hence only tests (1) and (2) need to be evaluated.)
-**
-** The formulas above are for computing the action when the lookahead is
-** a terminal symbol.  If the lookahead is a non-terminal (as occurs after
-** a reduce action) then the yy_reduce_ofst[] array is used in place of
-** the yy_shift_ofst[] array and YY_REDUCE_USE_DFLT is used in place of
-** YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT.
-**
-** The following are the tables generated in this section:
-**
-**  yy_action[]        A single table containing all actions.
-**  yy_lookahead[]     A table containing the lookahead for each entry in
-**                     yy_action.  Used to detect hash collisions.
-**  yy_shift_ofst[]    For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-**                     shifting terminals.
-**  yy_reduce_ofst[]   For each state, the offset into yy_action for
-**                     shifting non-terminals after a reduce.
-**  yy_default[]       Default action for each state.
-**
-*********** Begin parsing tables **********************************************/
-%%
-/********** End of lemon-generated parsing tables *****************************/
-
-/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.  
-** If a construct like the following:
-** 
-**      %fallback ID X Y Z.
-**
-** appears in the grammar, then ID becomes a fallback token for X, Y,
-** and Z.  Whenever one of the tokens X, Y, or Z is input to the parser
-** but it does not parse, the type of the token is changed to ID and
-** the parse is retried before an error is thrown.
-**
-** This feature can be used, for example, to cause some keywords in a language
-** to revert to identifiers if they keyword does not apply in the context where
-** it appears.
-*/
-#ifdef YYFALLBACK
-static const YYCODETYPE yyFallback[] = {
-%%
-};
-#endif /* YYFALLBACK */
-
-/* The following structure represents a single element of the
-** parser's stack.  Information stored includes:
-**
-**   +  The state number for the parser at this level of the stack.
-**
-**   +  The value of the token stored at this level of the stack.
-**      (In other words, the "major" token.)
-**
-**   +  The semantic value stored at this level of the stack.  This is
-**      the information used by the action routines in the grammar.
-**      It is sometimes called the "minor" token.
-**
-** After the "shift" half of a SHIFTREDUCE action, the stateno field
-** actually contains the reduce action for the second half of the
-** SHIFTREDUCE.
-*/
-struct yyStackEntry {
-  YYACTIONTYPE stateno;  /* The state-number, or reduce action in SHIFTREDUCE */
-  YYCODETYPE major;      /* The major token value.  This is the code
-                         ** number for the token at this stack level */
-  YYMINORTYPE minor;     /* The user-supplied minor token value.  This
-                         ** is the value of the token  */
-};
-typedef struct yyStackEntry yyStackEntry;
-
-/* The state of the parser is completely contained in an instance of
-** the following structure */
-struct yyParser {
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;          /* Pointer to top element of the stack */
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  int yyhwm;                    /* High-water mark of the stack */
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  int yyerrcnt;                 /* Shifts left before out of the error */
-#endif
-  ParseARG_SDECL                /* A place to hold %extra_argument */
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  int yystksz;                  /* Current side of the stack */
-  yyStackEntry *yystack;        /* The parser's stack */
-  yyStackEntry yystk0;          /* First stack entry */
-#else
-  yyStackEntry yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH];  /* The parser's stack */
-  yyStackEntry *yystackEnd;            /* Last entry in the stack */
-#endif
-};
-typedef struct yyParser yyParser;
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-#include <stdio.h>
-static FILE *yyTraceFILE = 0;
-static char *yyTracePrompt = 0;
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* 
-** Turn parser tracing on by giving a stream to which to write the trace
-** and a prompt to preface each trace message.  Tracing is turned off
-** by making either argument NULL 
-**
-** Inputs:
-** <ul>
-** <li> A FILE* to which trace output should be written.
-**      If NULL, then tracing is turned off.
-** <li> A prefix string written at the beginning of every
-**      line of trace output.  If NULL, then tracing is
-**      turned off.
-** </ul>
-**
-** Outputs:
-** None.
-*/
-void ParseTrace(FILE *TraceFILE, char *zTracePrompt){
-  yyTraceFILE = TraceFILE;
-  yyTracePrompt = zTracePrompt;
-  if( yyTraceFILE==0 ) yyTracePrompt = 0;
-  else if( yyTracePrompt==0 ) yyTraceFILE = 0;
-}
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* For tracing shifts, the names of all terminals and nonterminals
-** are required.  The following table supplies these names */
-static const char *const yyTokenName[] = { 
-%%
-};
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-/* For tracing reduce actions, the names of all rules are required.
-*/
-static const char *const yyRuleName[] = {
-%%
-};
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-/*
-** Try to increase the size of the parser stack.  Return the number
-** of errors.  Return 0 on success.
-*/
-static int yyGrowStack(yyParser *p){
-  int newSize;
-  int idx;
-  yyStackEntry *pNew;
-
-  newSize = p->yystksz*2 + 100;
-  idx = p->yytos ? (int)(p->yytos - p->yystack) : 0;
-  if( p->yystack==&p->yystk0 ){
-    pNew = malloc(newSize*sizeof(pNew[0]));
-    if( pNew ) pNew[0] = p->yystk0;
-  }else{
-    pNew = realloc(p->yystack, newSize*sizeof(pNew[0]));
-  }
-  if( pNew ){
-    p->yystack = pNew;
-    p->yytos = &p->yystack[idx];
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-    if( yyTraceFILE ){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sStack grows from %d to %d entries.\n",
-              yyTracePrompt, p->yystksz, newSize);
-    }
-#endif
-    p->yystksz = newSize;
-  }
-  return pNew==0; 
-}
-#endif
-
-/* Datatype of the argument to the memory allocated passed as the
-** second argument to ParseAlloc() below.  This can be changed by
-** putting an appropriate #define in the %include section of the input
-** grammar.
-*/
-#ifndef YYMALLOCARGTYPE
-# define YYMALLOCARGTYPE size_t
-#endif
-
-/* Initialize a new parser that has already been allocated.
-*/
-void ParseInit(void *yypParser){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)yypParser;
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  pParser->yyhwm = 0;
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  pParser->yytos = NULL;
-  pParser->yystack = NULL;
-  pParser->yystksz = 0;
-  if( yyGrowStack(pParser) ){
-    pParser->yystack = &pParser->yystk0;
-    pParser->yystksz = 1;
-  }
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  pParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-  pParser->yytos = pParser->yystack;
-  pParser->yystack[0].stateno = 0;
-  pParser->yystack[0].major = 0;
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
-  pParser->yystackEnd = &pParser->yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH-1];
-#endif
-}
-
-#ifndef Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
-** This function allocates a new parser.
-** The only argument is a pointer to a function which works like
-** malloc.
-**
-** Inputs:
-** A pointer to the function used to allocate memory.
-**
-** Outputs:
-** A pointer to a parser.  This pointer is used in subsequent calls
-** to Parse and ParseFree.
-*/
-void *ParseAlloc(void *(*mallocProc)(YYMALLOCARGTYPE)){
-  yyParser *pParser;
-  pParser = (yyParser*)(*mallocProc)( (YYMALLOCARGTYPE)sizeof(yyParser) );
-  if( pParser ) ParseInit(pParser);
-  return pParser;
-}
-#endif /* Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK */
-
-
-/* The following function deletes the "minor type" or semantic value
-** associated with a symbol.  The symbol can be either a terminal
-** or nonterminal. "yymajor" is the symbol code, and "yypminor" is
-** a pointer to the value to be deleted.  The code used to do the 
-** deletions is derived from the %destructor and/or %token_destructor
-** directives of the input grammar.
-*/
-static void yy_destructor(
-  yyParser *yypParser,    /* The parser */
-  YYCODETYPE yymajor,     /* Type code for object to destroy */
-  YYMINORTYPE *yypminor   /* The object to be destroyed */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-  switch( yymajor ){
-    /* Here is inserted the actions which take place when a
-    ** terminal or non-terminal is destroyed.  This can happen
-    ** when the symbol is popped from the stack during a
-    ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is 
-    ** being destroyed before it is finished parsing.
-    **
-    ** Note: during a reduce, the only symbols destroyed are those
-    ** which appear on the RHS of the rule, but which are *not* used
-    ** inside the C code.
-    */
-/********* Begin destructor definitions ***************************************/
-%%
-/********* End destructor definitions *****************************************/
-    default:  break;   /* If no destructor action specified: do nothing */
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** Pop the parser's stack once.
-**
-** If there is a destructor routine associated with the token which
-** is popped from the stack, then call it.
-*/
-static void yy_pop_parser_stack(yyParser *pParser){
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;
-  assert( pParser->yytos!=0 );
-  assert( pParser->yytos > pParser->yystack );
-  yytos = pParser->yytos--;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sPopping %s\n",
-      yyTracePrompt,
-      yyTokenName[yytos->major]);
-  }
-#endif
-  yy_destructor(pParser, yytos->major, &yytos->minor);
-}
-
-/*
-** Clear all secondary memory allocations from the parser
-*/
-void ParseFinalize(void *p){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)p;
-  while( pParser->yytos>pParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(pParser);
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH<=0
-  if( pParser->yystack!=&pParser->yystk0 ) free(pParser->yystack);
-#endif
-}
-
-#ifndef Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/* 
-** Deallocate and destroy a parser.  Destructors are called for
-** all stack elements before shutting the parser down.
-**
-** If the YYPARSEFREENEVERNULL macro exists (for example because it
-** is defined in a %include section of the input grammar) then it is
-** assumed that the input pointer is never NULL.
-*/
-void ParseFree(
-  void *p,                    /* The parser to be deleted */
-  void (*freeProc)(void*)     /* Function used to reclaim memory */
-){
-#ifndef YYPARSEFREENEVERNULL
-  if( p==0 ) return;
-#endif
-  ParseFinalize(p);
-  (*freeProc)(p);
-}
-#endif /* Parse_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK */
-
-/*
-** Return the peak depth of the stack for a parser.
-*/
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-int ParseStackPeak(void *p){
-  yyParser *pParser = (yyParser*)p;
-  return pParser->yyhwm;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*
-** Find the appropriate action for a parser given the terminal
-** look-ahead token iLookAhead.
-*/
-static unsigned int yy_find_shift_action(
-  yyParser *pParser,        /* The parser */
-  YYCODETYPE iLookAhead     /* The look-ahead token */
-){
-  int i;
-  int stateno = pParser->yytos->stateno;
- 
-  if( stateno>=YY_MIN_REDUCE ) return stateno;
-  assert( stateno <= YY_SHIFT_COUNT );
-  do{
-    i = yy_shift_ofst[stateno];
-    assert( iLookAhead!=YYNOCODE );
-    i += iLookAhead;
-    if( i<0 || i>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT || yy_lookahead[i]!=iLookAhead ){
-#ifdef YYFALLBACK
-      YYCODETYPE iFallback;            /* Fallback token */
-      if( iLookAhead<sizeof(yyFallback)/sizeof(yyFallback[0])
-             && (iFallback = yyFallback[iLookAhead])!=0 ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-        if( yyTraceFILE ){
-          fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sFALLBACK %s => %s\n",
-             yyTracePrompt, yyTokenName[iLookAhead], yyTokenName[iFallback]);
-        }
-#endif
-        assert( yyFallback[iFallback]==0 ); /* Fallback loop must terminate */
-        iLookAhead = iFallback;
-        continue;
-      }
-#endif
-#ifdef YYWILDCARD
-      {
-        int j = i - iLookAhead + YYWILDCARD;
-        if( 
-#if YY_SHIFT_MIN+YYWILDCARD<0
-          j>=0 &&
-#endif
-#if YY_SHIFT_MAX+YYWILDCARD>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT
-          j<YY_ACTTAB_COUNT &&
-#endif
-          yy_lookahead[j]==YYWILDCARD && iLookAhead>0
-        ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-          if( yyTraceFILE ){
-            fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sWILDCARD %s => %s\n",
-               yyTracePrompt, yyTokenName[iLookAhead],
-               yyTokenName[YYWILDCARD]);
-          }
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-          return yy_action[j];
-        }
-      }
-#endif /* YYWILDCARD */
-      return yy_default[stateno];
-    }else{
-      return yy_action[i];
-    }
-  }while(1);
-}
-
-/*
-** Find the appropriate action for a parser given the non-terminal
-** look-ahead token iLookAhead.
-*/
-static int yy_find_reduce_action(
-  int stateno,              /* Current state number */
-  YYCODETYPE iLookAhead     /* The look-ahead token */
-){
-  int i;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  if( stateno>YY_REDUCE_COUNT ){
-    return yy_default[stateno];
-  }
-#else
-  assert( stateno<=YY_REDUCE_COUNT );
-#endif
-  i = yy_reduce_ofst[stateno];
-  assert( i!=YY_REDUCE_USE_DFLT );
-  assert( iLookAhead!=YYNOCODE );
-  i += iLookAhead;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  if( i<0 || i>=YY_ACTTAB_COUNT || yy_lookahead[i]!=iLookAhead ){
-    return yy_default[stateno];
-  }
-#else
-  assert( i>=0 && i<YY_ACTTAB_COUNT );
-  assert( yy_lookahead[i]==iLookAhead );
-#endif
-  return yy_action[i];
-}
-
-/*
-** The following routine is called if the stack overflows.
-*/
-static void yyStackOverflow(yyParser *yypParser){
-   ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-   if( yyTraceFILE ){
-     fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sStack Overflow!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-   }
-#endif
-   while( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-   /* Here code is inserted which will execute if the parser
-   ** stack every overflows */
-/******** Begin %stack_overflow code ******************************************/
-%%
-/******** End %stack_overflow code ********************************************/
-   ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument var */
-}
-
-/*
-** Print tracing information for a SHIFT action
-*/
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-static void yyTraceShift(yyParser *yypParser, int yyNewState){
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    if( yyNewState<YYNSTATE ){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sShift '%s', go to state %d\n",
-         yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yypParser->yytos->major],
-         yyNewState);
-    }else{
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sShift '%s'\n",
-         yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yypParser->yytos->major]);
-    }
-  }
-}
-#else
-# define yyTraceShift(X,Y)
-#endif
-
-/*
-** Perform a shift action.
-*/
-static void yy_shift(
-  yyParser *yypParser,          /* The parser to be shifted */
-  int yyNewState,               /* The new state to shift in */
-  int yyMajor,                  /* The major token to shift in */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyMinor        /* The minor token to shift in */
-){
-  yyStackEntry *yytos;
-  yypParser->yytos++;
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-  if( (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack)>yypParser->yyhwm ){
-    yypParser->yyhwm++;
-    assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack) );
-  }
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
-  if( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystackEnd ){
-    yypParser->yytos--;
-    yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-    return;
-  }
-#else
-  if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yystksz] ){
-    if( yyGrowStack(yypParser) ){
-      yypParser->yytos--;
-      yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-      return;
-    }
-  }
-#endif
-  if( yyNewState > YY_MAX_SHIFT ){
-    yyNewState += YY_MIN_REDUCE - YY_MIN_SHIFTREDUCE;
-  }
-  yytos = yypParser->yytos;
-  yytos->stateno = (YYACTIONTYPE)yyNewState;
-  yytos->major = (YYCODETYPE)yyMajor;
-  yytos->minor.yy0 = yyMinor;
-  yyTraceShift(yypParser, yyNewState);
-}
-
-/* The following table contains information about every rule that
-** is used during the reduce.
-*/
-static const struct {
-  YYCODETYPE lhs;       /* Symbol on the left-hand side of the rule */
-  signed char nrhs;     /* Negative of the number of RHS symbols in the rule */
-} yyRuleInfo[] = {
-%%
-};
-
-static void yy_accept(yyParser*);  /* Forward Declaration */
-
-/*
-** Perform a reduce action and the shift that must immediately
-** follow the reduce.
-**
-** The yyLookahead and yyLookaheadToken parameters provide reduce actions
-** access to the lookahead token (if any).  The yyLookahead will be YYNOCODE
-** if the lookahead token has already been consumed.  As this procedure is
-** only called from one place, optimizing compilers will in-line it, which
-** means that the extra parameters have no performance impact.
-*/
-static void yy_reduce(
-  yyParser *yypParser,         /* The parser */
-  unsigned int yyruleno,       /* Number of the rule by which to reduce */
-  int yyLookahead,             /* Lookahead token, or YYNOCODE if none */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyLookaheadToken  /* Value of the lookahead token */
-){
-  int yygoto;                     /* The next state */
-  int yyact;                      /* The next action */
-  yyStackEntry *yymsp;            /* The top of the parser's stack */
-  int yysize;                     /* Amount to pop the stack */
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-  yymsp = yypParser->yytos;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE && yyruleno<(int)(sizeof(yyRuleName)/sizeof(yyRuleName[0])) ){
-    yysize = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs;
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sReduce [%s], go to state %d.\n", yyTracePrompt,
-      yyRuleName[yyruleno], yymsp[yysize].stateno);
-  }
-#endif /* NDEBUG */
-
-  /* Check that the stack is large enough to grow by a single entry
-  ** if the RHS of the rule is empty.  This ensures that there is room
-  ** enough on the stack to push the LHS value */
-  if( yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs==0 ){
-#ifdef YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH
-    if( (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack)>yypParser->yyhwm ){
-      yypParser->yyhwm++;
-      assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack));
-    }
-#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 
-    if( yypParser->yytos>=yypParser->yystackEnd ){
-      yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-      return;
-    }
-#else
-    if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yystksz-1] ){
-      if( yyGrowStack(yypParser) ){
-        yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
-        return;
-      }
-      yymsp = yypParser->yytos;
-    }
-#endif
-  }
-
-  switch( yyruleno ){
-  /* Beginning here are the reduction cases.  A typical example
-  ** follows:
-  **   case 0:
-  **  #line <lineno> <grammarfile>
-  **     { ... }           // User supplied code
-  **  #line <lineno> <thisfile>
-  **     break;
-  */
-/********** Begin reduce actions **********************************************/
-%%
-/********** End reduce actions ************************************************/
-  };
-  assert( yyruleno<sizeof(yyRuleInfo)/sizeof(yyRuleInfo[0]) );
-  yygoto = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].lhs;
-  yysize = yyRuleInfo[yyruleno].nrhs;
-  yyact = yy_find_reduce_action(yymsp[yysize].stateno,(YYCODETYPE)yygoto);
-
-  /* There are no SHIFTREDUCE actions on nonterminals because the table
-  ** generator has simplified them to pure REDUCE actions. */
-  assert( !(yyact>YY_MAX_SHIFT && yyact<=YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE) );
-
-  /* It is not possible for a REDUCE to be followed by an error */
-  assert( yyact!=YY_ERROR_ACTION );
-
-  if( yyact==YY_ACCEPT_ACTION ){
-    yypParser->yytos += yysize;
-    yy_accept(yypParser);
-  }else{
-    yymsp += yysize+1;
-    yypParser->yytos = yymsp;
-    yymsp->stateno = (YYACTIONTYPE)yyact;
-    yymsp->major = (YYCODETYPE)yygoto;
-    yyTraceShift(yypParser, yyact);
-  }
-}
-
-/*
-** The following code executes when the parse fails
-*/
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-static void yy_parse_failed(
-  yyParser *yypParser           /* The parser */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sFail!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-  }
-#endif
-  while( yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack ) yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-  /* Here code is inserted which will be executed whenever the
-  ** parser fails */
-/************ Begin %parse_failure code ***************************************/
-%%
-/************ End %parse_failure code *****************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-#endif /* YYNOERRORRECOVERY */
-
-/*
-** The following code executes when a syntax error first occurs.
-*/
-static void yy_syntax_error(
-  yyParser *yypParser,           /* The parser */
-  int yymajor,                   /* The major type of the error token */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyminor         /* The minor type of the error token */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#define TOKEN yyminor
-/************ Begin %syntax_error code ****************************************/
-%%
-/************ End %syntax_error code ******************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-
-/*
-** The following is executed when the parser accepts
-*/
-static void yy_accept(
-  yyParser *yypParser           /* The parser */
-){
-  ParseARG_FETCH;
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sAccept!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-  }
-#endif
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-  yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-  assert( yypParser->yytos==yypParser->yystack );
-  /* Here code is inserted which will be executed whenever the
-  ** parser accepts */
-/*********** Begin %parse_accept code *****************************************/
-%%
-/*********** End %parse_accept code *******************************************/
-  ParseARG_STORE; /* Suppress warning about unused %extra_argument variable */
-}
-
-/* The main parser program.
-** The first argument is a pointer to a structure obtained from
-** "ParseAlloc" which describes the current state of the parser.
-** The second argument is the major token number.  The third is
-** the minor token.  The fourth optional argument is whatever the
-** user wants (and specified in the grammar) and is available for
-** use by the action routines.
-**
-** Inputs:
-** <ul>
-** <li> A pointer to the parser (an opaque structure.)
-** <li> The major token number.
-** <li> The minor token number.
-** <li> An option argument of a grammar-specified type.
-** </ul>
-**
-** Outputs:
-** None.
-*/
-void Parse(
-  void *yyp,                   /* The parser */
-  int yymajor,                 /* The major token code number */
-  ParseTOKENTYPE yyminor       /* The value for the token */
-  ParseARG_PDECL               /* Optional %extra_argument parameter */
-){
-  YYMINORTYPE yyminorunion;
-  unsigned int yyact;   /* The parser action. */
-#if !defined(YYERRORSYMBOL) && !defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-  int yyendofinput;     /* True if we are at the end of input */
-#endif
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-  int yyerrorhit = 0;   /* True if yymajor has invoked an error */
-#endif
-  yyParser *yypParser;  /* The parser */
-
-  yypParser = (yyParser*)yyp;
-  assert( yypParser->yytos!=0 );
-#if !defined(YYERRORSYMBOL) && !defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-  yyendofinput = (yymajor==0);
-#endif
-  ParseARG_STORE;
-
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sInput '%s'\n",yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yymajor]);
-  }
-#endif
-
-  do{
-    yyact = yy_find_shift_action(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor);
-    if( yyact <= YY_MAX_SHIFTREDUCE ){
-      yy_shift(yypParser,yyact,yymajor,yyminor);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt--;
-#endif
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-    }else if( yyact <= YY_MAX_REDUCE ){
-      yy_reduce(yypParser,yyact-YY_MIN_REDUCE,yymajor,yyminor);
-    }else{
-      assert( yyact == YY_ERROR_ACTION );
-      yyminorunion.yy0 = yyminor;
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-      int yymx;
-#endif
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-      if( yyTraceFILE ){
-        fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sSyntax Error!\n",yyTracePrompt);
-      }
-#endif
-#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
-      /* A syntax error has occurred.
-      ** The response to an error depends upon whether or not the
-      ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".  
-      **
-      ** This is what we do if the grammar does define ERROR:
-      **
-      **  * Call the %syntax_error function.
-      **
-      **  * Begin popping the stack until we enter a state where
-      **    it is legal to shift the error symbol, then shift
-      **    the error symbol.
-      **
-      **  * Set the error count to three.
-      **
-      **  * Begin accepting and shifting new tokens.  No new error
-      **    processing will occur until three tokens have been
-      **    shifted successfully.
-      **
-      */
-      if( yypParser->yyerrcnt<0 ){
-        yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor,yyminor);
-      }
-      yymx = yypParser->yytos->major;
-      if( yymx==YYERRORSYMBOL || yyerrorhit ){
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-        if( yyTraceFILE ){
-          fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sDiscard input token %s\n",
-             yyTracePrompt,yyTokenName[yymajor]);
-        }
-#endif
-        yy_destructor(yypParser, (YYCODETYPE)yymajor, &yyminorunion);
-        yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-      }else{
-        while( yypParser->yytos >= yypParser->yystack
-            && yymx != YYERRORSYMBOL
-            && (yyact = yy_find_reduce_action(
-                        yypParser->yytos->stateno,
-                        YYERRORSYMBOL)) >= YY_MIN_REDUCE
-        ){
-          yy_pop_parser_stack(yypParser);
-        }
-        if( yypParser->yytos < yypParser->yystack || yymajor==0 ){
-          yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-          yy_parse_failed(yypParser);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-          yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-          yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-        }else if( yymx!=YYERRORSYMBOL ){
-          yy_shift(yypParser,yyact,YYERRORSYMBOL,yyminor);
-        }
-      }
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt = 3;
-      yyerrorhit = 1;
-#elif defined(YYNOERRORRECOVERY)
-      /* If the YYNOERRORRECOVERY macro is defined, then do not attempt to
-      ** do any kind of error recovery.  Instead, simply invoke the syntax
-      ** error routine and continue going as if nothing had happened.
-      **
-      ** Applications can set this macro (for example inside %include) if
-      ** they intend to abandon the parse upon the first syntax error seen.
-      */
-      yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
-      yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-      
-#else  /* YYERRORSYMBOL is not defined */
-      /* This is what we do if the grammar does not define ERROR:
-      **
-      **  * Report an error message, and throw away the input token.
-      **
-      **  * If the input token is $, then fail the parse.
-      **
-      ** As before, subsequent error messages are suppressed until
-      ** three input tokens have been successfully shifted.
-      */
-      if( yypParser->yyerrcnt<=0 ){
-        yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
-      }
-      yypParser->yyerrcnt = 3;
-      yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
-      if( yyendofinput ){
-        yy_parse_failed(yypParser);
-#ifndef YYNOERRORRECOVERY
-        yypParser->yyerrcnt = -1;
-#endif
-      }
-      yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-#endif
-    }
-  }while( yymajor!=YYNOCODE && yypParser->yytos>yypParser->yystack );
-#ifndef NDEBUG
-  if( yyTraceFILE ){
-    yyStackEntry *i;
-    char cDiv = '[';
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%sReturn. Stack=",yyTracePrompt);
-    for(i=&yypParser->yystack[1]; i<=yypParser->yytos; i++){
-      fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"%c%s", cDiv, yyTokenName[i->major]);
-      cDiv = ' ';
-    }
-    fprintf(yyTraceFILE,"]\n");
-  }
-#endif
-  return;
-}